ISODRAFT Reference Manual

ISODRAFT
Reference Manual
AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Disclaimer
Information of a technical nature, and particulars of the product and its use, is given by AVEVA
Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries without warranty. AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries disclaim
any and all warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, to the fullest extent permitted by law.
Neither the author nor AVEVA Solutions Ltd, or any of its subsidiaries, shall be liable to any person or
entity for any actions, claims, loss or damage arising from the use or possession of any information,
particulars, or errors in this publication, or any incorrect use of the product, whatsoever.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every
part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other
documentation supplied with it) belongs to AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries.
All other rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries. The information contained in
this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. Where such
permission is granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently
displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material
or electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. The user may also not
reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the
product described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product,
machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd, save as permitted by
law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal
prosecution.
The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with
the terms and conditions of the respective license agreements, and in accordance with the relevant
User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited.
First published September 2007
AVEVA Solutions Ltd, and its subsidiaries
AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom
Trademarks
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised
use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trade mark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
ISODRAFT Reference Manual
Contents
Page
Reference Manual
Introduction to this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
How this Manual is Organised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Command Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Setting Up ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bolting
..............................................................
DESIGN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piping Components in ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customising the Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials List and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isometric Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:3
2:4
2:4
2:5
2:5
2:6
2:7
Alphabetical Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10

ADD
.............................................................
ANGLEACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATEXT
.............................................................
ATTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTANAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXES
.............................................................
BENDRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOLTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:10
2:11
2:12
2:13
2:14
2:15
2:16
2:17
12.0
BOLTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOLTREPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BORES
.............................................................
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHARHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK
.............................................................
CLLENGTHFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTNOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTSHEETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTWELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATES or COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTPIPELISTFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTTINGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATE
.............................................................
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETAIL
.............................................................
DIMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMLABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMENSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISTANCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPMENTNUMBERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FALLINGLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILE
.............................................................
FLOWARROWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRAME
.............................................................
INSTALL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTNAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSULATIONCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISO
.............................................................
ISOTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEMCODE (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEMCODE (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOINTNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
2:18
2:20
2:21
2:22
2:23
2:24
2:26
2:27
2:27
2:28
2:29
2:30
2:31
2:33
2:34
2:35
2:37
2:38
2:38
2:39
2:42
2:43
2:44
2:48
2:49
2:50
2:50
2:51
2:54
2:55
2:57
2:59
2:59
2:59
2:61
2:62
2:62
2:64
2:65
2:67
12.0
KEYS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:68
LEGLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69
LINETHICKNESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
MARK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:71
MATCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72
MATERIALLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73
MATLISTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:79
MESSAGEACCURACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:80
MESSAGEFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81
MTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:82
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83
OUTCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83
OVERALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:86
PBENDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:86
PICTURESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87
PLOTDETAILDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88
PLOTTINGSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89
POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89
POSTPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:97
PRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98
PREPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98
PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98
PROJECTNUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99
Query
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99
RECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101
REFDIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101
REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102
REPEATABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103
RESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104
SETCOMPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105
SIZE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106
SKEWBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106
SPECBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:111
SPLIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:112
SPOOLNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113
STACKINGARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:115
SUPPORTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:116
SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117
iii
12.0
SYMBOLFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXTPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TITLEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACINGCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSFERFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRUNCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TUBESPLITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNITS
............................................................
WASTAGE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELDANGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZEROLENGTHSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:117
2:118
2:118
2:119
2:120
2:121
2:122
2:123
2:123
2:124
2:125
2:126
2:127
2:128
2:129
2:129
2:131
2:132
Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
P-points
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
CAP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3

CLOS Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
COUP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
CROS Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
FBLI Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
FILT Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
FLAN Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
FTUB Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15
INST Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
LJSE Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
PCOM Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
REDU Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25
Concentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25
Eccentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
iv
12.0
SHU Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30

TEE or OLET Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
TRAP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34
UNIO Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
UNIVERSAL Symbol Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
VALV Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:37
VENT Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39
VFWA Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39
VTWA Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40
WELD Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
Welded Lug Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Symbol Key Reference Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Alternative Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Isometric Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Title Block Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Plotted Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Line Summary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Printed Material List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
Weld Box Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
Bend Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Dynamic Detail Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Bolt Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Creating a Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Overall File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Material Control File Record Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Example of a Material Control File Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
12.0
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1

Examples of Isometric Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1
Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1
Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1
Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1
Pipe Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
Detail Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
Itemcodes containing the / character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
Instruments and Supports Tag Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
Material per Isometric Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
Specification Breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
System and Spool Isometrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
Format of COMPIPE Linelist File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:4

Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:5
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into

MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1
Importing a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1
Fonts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1
Installing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1

Utilities/Install Fonts menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:2
DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the Import Function . . . . . . . . D:2
Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:2
Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:3
Colour
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:3
Plotting the DGN file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:4
vi
12.0

Introduction to this Manual

This document is a Reference Manual for ISODRAFT. It describes all the commands
available to control the production of isometric drawings. It also shows the default Symbol
KEYs (SKEYs) that are used to plot the drawings and gives examples of PLOT files.
1.1
Who Should Use This Manual

This manual is aimed at experienced PDMS users and system administrators, who are
responsible for setting company standards for isometric production. It is assumed readers
have attended an Isometric Drawing Production training course, which covers the
relationship between the Catalogue database and ISODRAFT as well as ISODRAFT itself.
1.2
How this Manual is Organised

This manual is divided up into a number of logical chapters, as follows:
Command Reference Section - gives reference information for all of the ISODRAFT
commands.
Symbol Keys - illustrates the standard symbols used in ISODRAFT drawings, with their
reference codes (SKEYs), dimension and cataloguing requirements.
Alternative Texts - provides a complete listing of all standard text phrases used in
ISODRAFT drawings, with their reference codes (Alternative text or ATEXT numbers).
Material Control File - describes the Material Control File which can be used to pass details
of material requirements to an external material control program.
Error Messages - explains the error messages which may be output during an ISODRAFT
session.
Examples of Isometric Plots - contains examples of isometric plots illustrating the main
facilities provided by ISODRAFT.
Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module - gives details of how to pass ISODRAFT
material data to the COMPIPE module of the COMDACE system. This is specialist
information and need only be read by those users who will use this facility.
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation - gives details
of how to import ISODRAFT Isometric drawings into MicroStation as DXF files and then
correct any colour and font errors that may occur.
1:1
12.0

1.3
Conventions Used in This Manual

Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. In general,
these commands can be abbreviated. When a command is shown in this manual, the capital
letters of the command indicate the minimum abbreviation.
Note: This convention does not mean that you have to type the second part of the
command in lowercase letters. You can enter commands in any combination of
uppercase and lowercase letters.
For example, you can enter the command Check in any of the following forms:
CH
CHE
CHEC
CHECK
You cannot abbreviate commands shown wholly in uppercase letters.
Lowercase italics describe command arguments. You should replace the description
shown by the text or value you require. Here are some examples:
Name
Definition
Example
name
A PDMS element name
/PIPE-A63
refno
A PDMS reference number
=23/1403
integer
A positive integer
value
A positive or negative number
3.142
word
A sequence of up to four letters
FLOW
text
An alphanumeric string
Enclose between closing quotes
filename
The path name of a file
//net/sg99/testing. Note that when a

full path name is given, it will start with
two slashes: the first one is needed
because all names in PDMS must
start with a slash, and the second one
is the root of the path name.
1:2
12.0

Command Reference Section
2.1
Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs

The commands described in this chapter are presented in the form of syntax graphs.
Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, where

the capital letters indicate the minimum abbreviation.
Note: This convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typed
in lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase
and lowercase letters.
For example, the command:
Create
can be input in any of the following forms:
CR
CRE
CREA
CREAT
CREATE
Commands shown in all uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.
Command arguments are shown in lowercase letters. These are just descriptions of
what you need to enter. For example:
FONTDirectory name
means that to set the name of the Font Directory to newfonts, you enter
FONTD newfonts
Syntax graphs are read from top left to bottom right. The start point is shown by >, and
you can follow any path through the graph until the exit point, shown by >, is reached.
Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any
one of the commands to the right of the junction. For example:
>---+--- ABC ---.
|
|
|--- PQR --- |
|
|
------------+->
means you can type in ABC or PQR or just press Enter to get the default option.
Text in angle brackets <. . . > is the name of another syntax graph. This convention is
used for syntax which occurs in many places. The graphs referred to are described at
the end of this section. For example:
2:1
12.0

>---+--- ABC -----.

|
|
|--- PQR -----|
|
|
|--- <dia> ---|
|
|
-------------+--->
means you can type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in
diagram <dia> or just press Enter to get the default option.
Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command options
following these may be repeated as required. For example:
.-----<-------.
/
|
>---*--- option1 ---|
|
|
|--- option2 ---|
|
|
--- option3 ---+--->
means that you can enter any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3,
where the options can be commands, other syntax diagrams, or command arguments.
The simplified format

.----<------.
/
|
>---*--- name ----+--->
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.
Names in lowercase letters enclosed in angled brackets (e.g. <gid>) represent

subsidiary syntax diagrams. Most of the subsidiary syntax diagrams are given in the
Software Customisation Guide. The only ones used in this manual are <gid> and
<uval>.
In ISODRAFT, the <gid> syntax has the restricted range of options shown here.
>---+--- name ----.
|
|
--- refno ---+--->
The full range of options for <gid> are shown in the Command Reference Section of
the Software Customisation Guide. They apply only to database navigation operations.
<uval> is used to enter a dimension using a unit of measurement which is not the
current default unit:
>---+-- value -----.
|
|
-- <expres> --+-- EXponential -- value --.
|
|
--------------------------+--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|---
2:2
MM -------.
|
Metres ---|
|
INches ---|
|
FT -------|
|
FEet -----|
|
text -----|
12.0

|
|
--------------+-->
where <expres> is another subsidiary diagram representing the range of mathematical

expressions which can be used to input values, and text represents a user-defined unit
of measurement. Using expressions in PDMS is described in the Software
Customisation Guide.
For example:
9.75 INCH
1.5 FT
Note: For information about the syntax for PML, the PDMS Programmable Macro
Language, and the PDMS forms and menus, see the Software Customisation Guide.
2.2
Command Summary
The following sections list the MODULE commands in functional groups. These sections
correspond to Chapters 2 to 9 in the ISODRAFT User Guide.
2.2.1
Setting Up ISODRAFT
COMMAND
Brief description
ADD
Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed

by the CHECK or DETAIL command.
CHANGE
HIGHLIGHTING
Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour

pen.
CHECK
Extracts isometric data from the database but does not pass it
to the plotting function. This is used to check the data or
create a transfer file.
DELETE
Deletes an SKEY definition from a symbol library.
DETAIL
Generates and plots isometric drawings for the elements in

the list.
FILE
Specifies the name of the PLOT file to which the isometric

drawing output is sent.
INSTALLSETUP
Restores the settings to those saved in the macro or binary file

using the RECREATE command.
MESSAGEFILENAME
Specifies the name of the file to which messages about the

progress of the detailing are sent.
OPTIONS
Allows you to reset all options to their default settings.
POSTPROCESS
Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to be

executed during ISODRAFTs intermediate transfer file
processing.
PROCESS
Instructs ISODRAFT to process a transfer file.
2:3
12.0

2.2.2
2.2.3
COMMAND
Brief description
Query
Allows you to find the current settings of the options.
RECREATE
Creates a macro or binary file which can be read into

ISODRAFT to restore the current settings.
REMOVE
Removes elements from the list to be detailed.
SETCOMPDATE
Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.
SYMBOLFILENAME
Specifies the name of a symbol library.
TRANSFERFILENAME
Allows you to save a transfer file generated during

ISODRAFTS data extraction operations, for subsequent
processing.
Bolting
COMMAND
Brief description
BOLTFILE
Specifies the name of the bolt report file, produced using the
BOLTREPORT command.
BOLTING
Specifies where and how the bolt lengths are to be shown in the
material list.
BOLTREPORT
Allows you to output a report on the bolting containing identical

information to that displayed in the material list.
DESIGN Requirements
COMMAND
Brief description
JOINTNUMBERS
Allows you to display the joint numbers

created in SPOOLER on the isometric.
MATERIAL LIST PARTNUMBERS

FROMDB
Allows you to select whether to use the part

numbers created by SPOOLER.
PBENDNUMBERS
Allows you to display the pulled bend

numbers created in SPOOLER on the
isometric.
SPOOLNUMBERS FROMDB
Lets you specify whether to use the numbers

created by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFT
number the spools itself.
WELDNUMBERS FROMDB
Lets you decide whether to use the numbers

created by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFT
number the spools itself.
2:4
12.0

2.2.4
2.2.5
Piping Components in ISODRAFT
COMMAND
Brief description
CUTBACK
To make sure there is sufficient length between a

pulled bend and the end of the pipe to be gripped by
the bending machine and that a pipe with a threaded
end is long enough to be gripped by the threading,
machine.
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE
Allows you to specify an additional length on cut tube

to compensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges,
where the ALLO attribute has not been set.
Customising the Drawing Sheet
COMMAND
Brief description
ATEXT
Allows you to change the standard text on isometric

drawings.
CUTMARKS
Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall

drawing sheet.
DATE
Allows you to specify the format for showing the date

in the drawings title block.
DISTANCES
Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of

lengths and distances.
FRAME
Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text

are drawn.
ISO
Defines the view direction to be used for generating

the isometric plot.
ISOTYPE
Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication

information, erection information or both.
MARGIN
Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the

drawing.
MARK
Allows you to define whether the pipe revision

attribute (REV) should be incremented and the
Branch detail attribute should be set to true after
successful detailing.
PLOTDETAILDATA
Allows you to define whether and how to display

parameterised attribute data in the detail PLOT files.
PLOTTINGSCALE
Defines the scale of the plot independently of the

drawing sheet size.
2:5
12.0

2.2.6
COMMAND
Brief description
POSITION
Allows you to create tables of standard text

annotations or pipe attributes.
PROJECTNUMBER
Writes the project number into the title block area.
RESERVE
Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of

either the drawing or material list areas.
SIZE
Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing

sheet.
STACKINGARRANGEMENT
Allows you to define how to position multiple plots on

a single sheet.
TEXTPOSITION
Allows you to create tables of standard text

annotations or pipe attributes.
TITLEBLOCK
Allows you to add extra text to the title block.
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME
Allows you to define a background PLOT file; letting

you plot directly on top of this background plot.
Materials List and Reports
COMMAND
Brief description
ATTEXTS
Defines selection rules and expressions (typically

attribute values) for appending attached text to
descriptions in material lists.
CLLENGTHFILE
Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with or

without an insulation centreline summary, should be
output as a report.
CUTPIPELISTFILE
Produces a customisable report giving details of all cut

pipes in the isometric.
CUTTINGLIST
Defines a table in the material list showing details of all

the cut pipes in the isometric.
DELIMITER
Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as

the itemcode suffix delimiter.
DTEXTS
Controls the material description part of the item

description.
EQUIPMENTNUMBERING
Controls numbering of items on materials list for an

equipment trim isometric.
INSTNAME
Allows you to define how instruments are described in

the materials list.
ITEMCODE (1)
Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their

itemcodes on the isometric drawing.
2:6
12.0

2.2.7
COMMAND
Brief description
ITEMCODE (2)
Specifies whether or not specification names are to be

included in material list itemcodes, and whether items
which have the same itemcode except for the
specification name and suffix are treated as the same
item.
KEYS
Allows components with specified SKEYs to be treated

like instruments.
MATCONTROL
Creates a material control file.
MATERIALLIST
Allows you to control whether the material list is drawn

on the isometric and alter the display format if required.
MATLISTFILENAME
Specifies the name of the file into which the materials

list can be saved.
MTEXTS
Controls the complete material description part of the

item description.
SUPPORTFILENAME
Specifies the name of a file into which the schedule for

pipe supports is saved.
WASTAGEAREA
Defines wastage areas that can be given different

wastage factors for cut pipe lengths.
Isometric Drawing
COMMAND
Brief description
ANGLEACCURACY
Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the

reporting of angles.
ATTANAME
Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified.
AXES
Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing

3D positions on drawings.
BENDRADIUS
Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown and in

what units.
BORES
Allows you to specify the units for input of pipe nominal

bores.
CHARHEIGHT
Specifies the character height to be used for annotating

text on drawings.
CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS
Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected to

nozzles on Plant equipment.
2:7
12.0

COMMAND
Brief description
CONTNOTES
Specifies continuation notes at the end points on

drawings for when the connection goes to another
isometric.
CONTSHEETS
Allows you to specify that the sheet number of the

continuation sheets be shown
CONTWELDS
Allows you to plot welds on the current isometric that are

to belong to another drawing.
COORDINATES
Specifies the drawing

coordinates are shown.
DIMDIST
Specifies the standout distance, between dimensioning

lines and pipe/ component centrelines.
DIMENSIONS
Specifies dimensioning style.
ELEVATION
Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be

shown.
FALLINGLINES
Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline

before it is shown as a skew.
FALLSKEWS
Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed/falling

pipelines are shown.
FLOWARROWS
Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots.
INSULATIONCONTROL
Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted.
LEGLENGTH
Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows,

tees and crosses.
LINETHICKNESS
Allows you to control (optionally) the thickness of line

used to represent piping.
MESSAGEACCURACY
Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are

positioned.
OUTCOM
Defines the style in which attributes are shown on the

isometric drawing area.
OVERALLSKEWS
Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are

shown as overall skewboxes across branches, or as
separate skewboxes between branch connections.
PICTURESCALE
Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing.
PRECISION
Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.
REFDIMENSIONS
Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off.
REPEATABILITY
Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split

points.
2:8
locations
at
which
spatial
12.0

COMMAND
Brief description
SKEWBOX
Controls how skewed piping is shown.
SPECBREAK
Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline

specification is noted, and which changes are shown.
SPLIT
Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a

pipeline is split over more than one sheet.
SUPPORTS
Defines whether support positions are shown and are

dimensioned as overall or string dimensions.
TAGGING
Allows you to identify individual components on the

isometric plot by means of name tags.
TAPPING
Sets the scale of the tapping leg and switches tapping leg
dimensions and coordinates on and off.
TOLERANCE
Specifies the maximum misalignment between

components regarded as having the same axis.
TRACINGCONTROL
Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted.
TRUNCATE
Stops rounding remainders of dimensions being added to

the next dimension.
TUBESPLITS
Controls how splits in tube are placed.
UNITS
Specifies units of measurement to be used for

ISODRAFTs output.
WELDANGLES
Allows configuration in which one pipe is welded to

another pipe or component such that the flow directions
of the two objects are non-parallel.
WELDID
Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric by

name.
WELDNUMBERS
Controls numbering the welds on an isometric.
WELDTYPE
Controls which types of end connection are shown on

drawings.
ZEROLENGTH-SKEWS
Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.
2:9
12.0

2.3
Alphabetical Command Reference
2.3.1
ADD
Function:
Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed by

the next CHECK or DETAIL command.
Description:
The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can be

defined before giving a CHECK or DETAIL command by setting
up a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the ADD
command and remove them using the REMOVE command.
(The REMOVE command is often used to remove members of
an owning element such as Site or Zone which have been
added.) The next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command will
then process all the elements in the Detail List.
If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can be
stored in the DESIGN database. As such, individual sheets can
be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command.
Examples:
ADD /ZONE2 /PIPE3-2

Adds Zone 2 and PIPE3-2 to the Detail List.
ADD SHEE 2 /PIPE-2
Adds sheet 2 of PIPE-2 to the Detail List.
ADD SHEE SING /PIPE2
Adds /PIPE-2 to the Detail List, and specifies that the
isometric will be plotted on a single sheet
ADD SPOO 2 /PIPE-4
Adds spool 2 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List.
ADD SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4
Adds spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List. This
form of the command can only be used in conjunction with
SPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING.
ADD SPOO SPOO20 /PIPE-5
Adds the spool identified by the text SPOO20 of /PIPE-5 to
the Detail List
Related
Commands:
REMOVE CHECK DETAIL REPEATABILITY
2:10
12.0

Command Syntax:
.----<---------------------------------------------.
/
|
>- ADD --*-- <gid> -------------------------------------------|
|
|
|-- SHEETNumber --+-- integer --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-- SINGle ---+------------.
|
|
|
|
-- SPOOl ---+-- integer --.-- OF integer --|
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-----------------|
|
|
|
|
-- text -----------------------+-<gid>-+->
Restrictions:
The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in an Add

List is 100.
The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or
spools) is 20. You can only add sheets for a Pipe which has
previously been detailed with REPEATABILITY on, so that split
points have been stored in the DESIGN database. See the
REPEATABILITY command.
Querying:
Q DETaillist
Lists contents of both Add and
Remove lists.
2.3.2
ANGLEACCURACY
Function:
Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the reporting

of angles on the isometric.
Description:
For bend and elbow angles, and orientation angles for tees,
valve and instrument spindles, you can vary the accuracy
with which ISODRAFT reports the angle on the isometric.
You can use one of two settings:
Examples:
To the nearest 0.1 degree (default)
To the nearest 0.01 degree
ANGLEACC 1
Sets angle reporting accuracy to the nearest 0.01
degree.
Related Commands:
FALLINGLINES
Command Syntax:
>--- ANGLEACCuracy value --->
where value is either 0 or 1 (as described above).
2:11
12.0

2.3.3
ATEXT
Function:
Allows you to change standard text on isometric drawings.
Description:
Each standard annotation text on an ISODRAFT drawing is

identified by a unique code number, known as its Atext
(Alternative Text) number. The ATEXT command allows you
to change the text characters associated with a particular
Atext number, so that your text replaces the standard text at
the same place on the drawing.
Alternative text should contain only standard ISODRAFT
characters, since certain keyboard symbols cannot be
reproduced by ISODRAFT. The normal character set for
ISODRAFT consists of:
The letters A to Z inclusive
The letters a to z inclusive
The numbers 0 to 9 inclusive
The space character
+*.,[]():#=|
Text can be deleted by redefining it as a null string, that is, the
Atext number followed by two quotes with no characters
between them.
Text is reset to the standard by giving the command ATEXT
just followed by the Atext number.
See Alternative Texts for a list of all standard Atexts with their
corresponding Atext numbers.
Examples:
ATEXT 15 STRAIGHT TUBE

Sets Atext 15 to the specified wording.
ATEXT 15
Resets Atext 15 to its default wording, STRAIGHT
PIPE.
ATEXT 410
Deletes Atext number 410, the line summary note.
Command Syntax:
>-- ATExt -- atextnumber --+-- newtext --.

|
|
-------------+-->
where atextnumber identifies the text to be changed and

newtext defines the new text to be associated with that Atext
number.
Note: newtext must be enclosed between quotes in the
usual way.
2:12
12.0

Querying:
2.3.4
Q ---- ATExt ---+--|

|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
---
integer --------.
|
DRAWing --------|
|
TITLeblock -----|
|
PRINtedmatl ----|
|
PLOTtedmatl ----|
|
LINEsummary ----|
|
WELDbox --------|
|
BOLTreport -----|
|
BENDtable ------|
|
ALL ------------+--->
Q ATEXT 15
Gives current text for Atext 15.
Q ATEXT
DRAW
Gives current text for all Atexts associated

with the drawing area. Alternative Texts
lists Atexts grouped under the areas with
which they are associated. Settings
changed from the default are shown by
asterisks *.
Q ATEXT ALL
Gives current text for all Atexts. Settings

changed from the default are shown by
asterisks *.
ATTEXTS
Function:
Allows you to append text, typically UDA and/or other

attribute settings, to descriptions in material lists.
Description:
Standard descriptions in material lists comprise a geometric

description (RTEX attribute of DTEXT) and a material
description (XTEX attribute of MTEXT). This command lets
you append further text defined by an expression (typically
including settings of UDAs or other attributes) if a
predefined selection rule gives a True result.
2:13
12.0

Examples:
ATTEX (Flange '+AFTER (NAME,'/')+' at position '+STR

(POS)+' has 'STR (NWELDS)+' additional welds') ON all
flange with (NWELDS GT 0)
If a flange has additional welds, appends the text 'Flange /
name at position, position has number additional welds' to
the item description in the material list.
ATTEX (Colour: ' + :Colour) ON ALL BRANCH MEMBERS
Appends the text 'Colour: colour_defined_by_UDA_
:Colour' to the descriptions of all branch members.
Command Syntax:
>- ATTEXts -+- expression - ON - selection_rule -.

|
|
- NONE -----------------------------+-->
where expression defines the text to be appended if

selection_rule evaluates to a True result.
2.3.5
ATTANAME
Function:
Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified on

ISODRAFT drawings.
Description:
By default, the names of support attachment points (that is,

all ATTAs for which the ATTY attribute is unset) are not
shown on the isometric plot and their SPREFs
(specification references) are used as their itemcodes.
You can use the ATTANAME command to display the
PDMS names of support ATTAs on the drawings, and to
specify whether their PDMS names or their SPREFs are
used as their itemcodes.
By default, ATTA names are not shown on the isometric plot
and their SPREFs are used as their itemcodes.
Examples:
ATTANAME DRAWING
Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing;
SPREFs used as itemcodes.
ATTANAME SPREF
Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing;
names also used as itemcodes.
ATTANAME OFF
ATTA names not shown on drawings; SPREFs used
as itemcodes.
2:14
12.0

2.3.6
Command Syntax:
>--- ATTAName ---+--- DRAwing ---.

|
|
|--- SPREf -----|
|
|
--- OFF* ------+--->
Querying:
Q ATTAName
Q OPTions
AXES
Function:
Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing 3D

positions on drawings.
Description:
By default, all spatial coordinates on isometrics are given in

the World coordinate system. The AXES command allows
you to specify a different coordinate system for the
isometric. You can use the origin of any database element
which has an origin.
Each owning element (Site, Zone etc.) in a design project
has its own coordinate system for locating the elements it
owns. The coordinates of an element are usually defined
with respect to its owner, and these coordinates are not
normally the same as World coordinates.
Examples:
AXES /SITE_PIPE-2
All coordinates to be referred to the origin of site
SITE_PIPE-2.
AXES
WORLD
Resets to the default of the World coordinates.

Command Syntax:
>--- AXES --- <gid> --->
Querying:
Q AXES
Q OPTions
Note: To minimise inaccuracies when performing calculations using very large coordinates,
ISODRAFT performs all its calculations relative to the origin of the Zone that owns
the first Branch in the detail list. Thus when creating piping a great distance from the
World origin, it is beneficial to move the Zone origin first, to a position local to where
the piping will be created. (If the Zone origin is at the World origin, no benefit will be
gained by this approach.)
2:15
12.0

2.3.7
BENDRADIUS
Function:
Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown on drawings and

in what units.
Description:
By default, bend radii will be output in distance units for all pulled
bends, that is for all components with SKEYs beginning with PB.
The radii of pulled bends are extracted from their RADI attributes. If
the RADI attribute is set to zero and the SKEY is of the format
PBnD where n is an integer (e.g. PB5D), then the integer will be
extracted, multiplied by the pipe diameter, converted to distance
units if appropriate, and output as the bend radius.
Bend radii can be shown either in distance units or as multiples of
pipe diameters (where pipe diameter is taken as the nominal bore
of the pipe). The Atexts associated with the output of bend radii are
Atext 337, D BEND RADIUS (for bend radii in multiples of pipe
diameters), and Atext 338, BEND RADIUS (for bend radii in
distance units). Setting either of these to be blank causes the entire
message to be suppressed, including the actual radius value.
A standard radius for bends can be set using the BENDRADIUS
STANDARD command. If a standard radius is set, only bends which
have radii different from the standard radius will have their radii
shown individually. Both the standard radius and any individual radii
will be shown in the same format (i.e. in distance units or in pipe
diameters).
A note giving the value of the standard radius can be positioned on
the sheet using the POSITION command. The usual method is to
plot a suitable message, such as:
All pulled bends to be D unless otherwise

shown
as part of an underlay (see the UNDERLAYPLOTFILE command).
Then use the POSITION command to create text giving the actual
radius value in the space immediately before the D.
You can also include a table of bending data on the isometric using
the POSITION command (see POSITION BENDTABLE command
for more details).
Examples:
BENDRAD DEFAULT
BENDRAD
All bend radii to be shown in current distance units (no
standard value).
BENDRAD STAND 200

Bend radii to be shown in mm, but only if not equal to 200mm
(assumes current distance units are mm).
BENDRAD DIAM
Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters.
2:16
12.0

BENDRAD STAND 5 DIAM

Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters, but
only if they do not equal 5 diameters.
BENDRAD OFF
No bend radii to be shown on the drawing.
BENDRADIUS STANDARD 5D
POSI BENDRADIUS AT X200 Y50
Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only nonstandard radii output on isometric. Both standard note and nonstandard radii output in multiples of pipe diameter.
BENDRAD STAN 1000

POSI BENDRAD AT X200 Y50
Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only
non-standard radii output on isometric. Both standard note
and non-standard radii output in current distance units (mm or
inch).
2.3.8
Command Syntax:
>-- BENDRADius --+-- DEFault -----------------------------.

|
|
|-- STANdard -- value --.
|
|
|
|
|-----------------------+-- Diameters ---|
|
|
|
|
'----------------|
-- OFF ---------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q BENDRADius
Q OPTions
BOLTFILE
Function:
This specifies the name of the bolt report file produced via the
BOLTREPORT command.
Description:
The bolt report file is an ASCII file. You can specify a page length
for the file (with a default of 55 lines), and whether the report
should append to an existing file (default) or overwrite an existing
file.
Examples:
BOLTF /BOLTREP1
Gives the resulting bolt report file the name BOLTREP1. If this file
already exists, the information produced from the BOLTREPORT
command will be added to the end of the existing file.
BOLTF /BOLTREP1 OVER

Specifies that the bolt report file should overwrite ANY existing file
of the same name.
BOLTF /BOLTREP1 WI 70 LI
Specifies that the bolt report file name is BOLTREP1 and that it
has a page length of 70 lines.
2:17
12.0

2.3.9
Related Commands:
BOLTING BOLTREPORT MATERIALLIST
Command Syntax:
>-----BOLTFile
filename ---+---OVERwrite--------.
|
|
--WIth value LInes -+--->
BOLTING
Function:
Specifies where and how bolt lengths are to be shown in the

material list.
Description:
ISODRAFT calculates bolting requirements from the Catalogue

bolt tables. Bolt lengths can be included in the itemcode or the
item description or both. If bolt lengths are to be included in the
itemcodes, they can either be appended to the rest of the code
or they can be inserted in place of a specified text string.
By default, bolt lengths are included in the item description
column of the material list and are appended to the itemcodes.
For the Material Control File, you can specify that the lengths
and diameters are both shown as metric, or both shown as
imperial. Setting the Material Control file units changes the bolt
dimensioning units specified by the UNITS command; it sets a
flag in the Material Control File (the tens column of Word 2 of
Record 60). This flag setting can be interpreted by an
independent material control program, which must provide its
own look-up tables of standard size conversions to give the
required dimensioning units.
You can set up the SPCOM name in the Specification to include
text which can then be replaced by the bolt lengths to form the
itemcode.
Examples:
BOLT LENG DESC ON

Bolt lengths shown in description column of material list.
BOLT LENG ITEMCODE INSERT AT Here

Bolt lengths replace locating text Here in the itemcode.
BOLT LENG DESC OFF ITEMCODE INSERT Here

Bolt lengths omitted from description column, but inserted
in itemcode column where shown by the Here keyword.
BOLTing
LENgth
ITEMcode
APPend
Adds the bolt length to the end of the itemcode.
2:18
12.0

BOLTing
LENgth
ITEMcode
OFF
Bolt lengths not shown in itemcode.
BOLTING DEFAULT
Resets all bolting options to their default states, namely:
Lengths shown in descriptions.
Lengths appended to itemcodes.
Material control units flag set to metric lengths and imperial
diameters.
BOLTing OFF
Bolting information will not be shown on the material list.
Command Syntax:
>-BOLTing
Querying:
--+-|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-|
--
UNITs --+-|
|-|
|-|
--
METImp* ---.
|
METric ----|
|
IMPerial --|
|
DEFault ---+-------------------------------.
|
.----------------------------------------. |
/
| |
LENgth --*-- DESCription --+-- ON* --.
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
'-- OFF --+--------------| |
|
| |
-- ITEMcode --+-- OFF --------------------| |
|
| |
|-- APPend* ----------------| |
|
| |
-- INSert -+- AT -.
| |
|
|
| |
------+- text -+--|
|
|
DEFault --.
|
|
|
OFF ------+--------------------------------------------+->
Q BOLTing
Q OPTions
2:19
12.0

2.3.10
BOLTREPORT
Function:
Allows you to output a bolt report containing equivalent

information to that contained in the material list.
Description:
BOLTREPORT generates a material list file relevant to bolting.

You dont need to have all the piping geometry correct before
creating a report, but you do have to have the pipes populated
with flanges and flanged components.
Note: It is vital to have connectivity correct before generating
the report to make sure that all pipes are fully scanned.
You can include positional information in the report, consisting
of the centrelines of associated flanges in the coordinate
system (as defined by the AXES command).
Note: Bolting reports can be produced even if you have turned
material lists off (with the MATEriallist OFF command).
If you specify a filename for the report using the BOLTFILE
command the information will be output to an ASCII file.
Otherwise the report will be sent to your screen.
Finally, you should note that in the material list the bolt diameter
is output in the units determined by the UNITS option, and the
bolt length inserted in the itemcode and description is output in
units determined by the BOLTING UNITS option (this is
because all items in the material list must take the same
diameter units). The bolting report, however, does not have this
restriction. That is, the units of the diameter of the bolt are
determined by the BOLTING UNITS option.
The report will contain the following information:
Examples:
Diameter in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING

UNITS command)
Length in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING

UNITS command)
Itemcode (format
truncated)
Description (unless MATERIALLIST NODESCRIPTIONS

has been set)
Position (if requested in the BOLTREPORT syntax)
Quantity for erection and/or quantity for fabrication

materials. The quantity will be summated if the diameter,
length and itemcode are identical. Erection and fabrication
quantities are summated separately.
defined
by
options
settings,
not
BOLTR /PIPE-1
Outputs a bolting report for PIPE-1.
BOLTR ALL WITH POS

Outputs a bolting report for all pipes in the detail list,
including positional information.
2:20
12.0

2.3.11
Related Commands:
BOLTING BOLTFILE MATERIALLIST
Command Syntax:
.---------<---------.
|
|
>-- BOLTReport --+---------+---- <gid> --------|
|
|
|
-- ALL --+-- WITH POSition --|
|
|
-------------------+-->
BORES
Function:
Allows you to specify the units for input of pipe nominal bores.
Description:
The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units which
are assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) are
normally derived from the Catalogue. You may change the
default units independently for input of pipe bores and/or
distances along pipelines or across components by using the
related BORES and DISTANCES commands.
Note: The UNITS command is used to set output units.
The current default units can be overridden for any item of input
data by giving the units explicitly.
Examples:
MM BORES
Input bores assumed to be in mm unless otherwise
specified.
INCH BORES
Input bores assumed to be in inches unless otherwise
specified.
FINCH BORES
Input bores assumed to be in feet and inches unless
otherwise specified (e.g. 13 represents 1ft 3in, 9
represents 9in).
Related Commands:
DISTANCES
Command Syntax:
>---+--|
|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q UNIts
MILlimetre ---.
|
MM -----------|
|
FInch --------|
|
INch ---------+--- BOres -------.
|
|
--- DIstances ---+--->
2:21
12.0

2.3.12
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING
Function:
Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour.
Description:
Change Highlighting enables you to set standards for how

changed items on drawings will be represented.
By default, Change Highlighting is OFF. If set ON, then all
changed components complying with the defined change
highlighting rules, will be shown in the specified highlight colour.
A Change Rule applies to components only. For table entries,
material list entries, annotations and dimensions; these will
always be drawn in the specified highlight colour if they have
changed. The default highlight colour is red. The user may
specify one of 12 pen colours to represent the changed items.
The integer associated with each colour is as follows: 1 = grey, 2
= red, 3 = orange, 4 = yellow, 5 = green, 6 = cyan, 7 = blue, 8 =
violet, 9 = brown, 10 = white, 11 = pink, 12 = mauve.
In order to determine which items have changed you must
specify a Comparison Date, this determines the baseline in time
for the drawing. Any item that has changed since this baseline
time will then be subject to Change Highlighting. The
Comparison Date is entered either as an actual date/time or as
a Stamp. A Stamp is a way of referencing database(s) at
specified stages in a project. For more information on Stamps
refer to the Administrator Command Reference Manual and the
Administrator User Guide.
Examples:
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING ON
Turns the Change Highlighting function 'on'.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING OFF

Turns the Change Highlighting function 'off'.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING CLEAR

Removes all defined Change Highlighting rules.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH

(MODIFIED())
All modified elbows will be shown in the selected highlight
pen colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH

(MODIFIED(POS))
All elbows whose position has been modified will be
shown in the selected highlight pen colour.
2:22
12.0

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING
(CREATED())
RULE
ALL
ELBO
WITH
All newly created elbows will be shown in the selected

highlight pen colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR 8

Sets the Change Highlighting pen colour to violet.
Related Commands
SETCOMPDATE
Command Syntax:
>--- CHANGE---|--- HIGHLIGHTING---+-|-|-|---
Querying:
2.3.13
ON ---------------------.
OFF --------------------|
CLEAR ------------------|
COLOUR ----- integer ---|
RULE ----+-- UNSET -----|
-- <SELATT> --+--->
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING MODE
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE
CHARHEIGHT
Function:
Specifies the character height to be used for annotating text on

drawings.
Description:
The CHARHeight command defines the height of characters

used on isometric drawings.
This command does not affect characters: on the material list,
which are controlled by the MATERIALLIST CHARHeight
command; weld numbers or characters in the title block and
frame.
Example:
CHARH 2.0
corresponds to 2.0mm
CHARH 0.125 INCH
corresponds to 1/8 inch
Command Syntax:
>--- CHARHeight - value ----->
Querying:
Q CHARHeight
Q OPTions
2:23
12.0

2.3.14
CHECK
Function:
Creates a transfer file.
Description:
The CHECK command extracts isometric data from the Design

and Catalogue databases and creates a transfer file.
The extended CHECK AS ... option allows you to check a
complete system isometric with a single command.
The extended CHECK AS EQUIPMENT ... option allows you to
check a collection of pipes as equipment trim.
If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can be
stored in the DESIGN database. In this case, individual sheets
can be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY
command.
The capability to CHECK Pipe Spools (PSPOOLs) and Pipe
Spool Lists (PSLISTs) is available in ISODRAFT.
All of the functionality available to CHECK PIPEs and
BRANCHes in earlier versions of Isodraft is now also available
to CHECK PSPOOLs and PSLISTs. Such PSPOOLs and
PSLISTs are created in the Pipe Production Checks utility in the
Design module and, after their creation, they are visible
beneath the owning pipe in the Design Explorer. Then they are
subsequently also visible in the Design Explorer in the Isodraft
module. The PSPOOL or PSLIST may be made the Current
Element (CE) and then CHECKed in the usual way.
A second way in which PSPOOLs and PSLISTs may be
CHECKed is by making them members of the Detaillist. This is
accomplished using the usual ADD/REMOVE commands which
are already available for adding and removing Pipe and Branch
elements of the Detaillist.
Examples:
CHECK /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1

Checks named elements only.
CHECK ALL
Checks the current Detail List (see the ADD and
REMOVE commands).
CHECK /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS REFINER

Checks the two named sites and combines the plot information
into a single system isometric with the drawing title REFINER.
CHECK SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2

Checks sheet 2 of PIPE-2.
CHECK SPOO 2 /PIPE-4

Checks spool 2 of PIPE-4.
2:24
12.0

CHECK SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4

Checks spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4.
CHECK ISO BASEFLOOR /SITE2-1 /PIPE2-2-1

Checks the named elements of drawing BASEFLOOR.
CHECK PSPOOL2 OF PSLIST1 OF PIPE /013-0001A150-100

Checks a single PSPOOL.
CHECK PSLIST1 OF PIPE /011-0001-A150-100

Checks a PSPOOL list.
Related Commands:
ADD
DETAIL
REMOVE SPOOLNUMBERS
Command Syntax:
.------------------------------------------.
|
|
>- CHeck -*- <gid> --------------------------------- |
|
|
|- ALL ------------------------------------|
|
|
|- SHEETNumber -+- integer -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
- SINGle --+----.
|
|
|
|
|- SPOOl -+- integ -+- OF integ -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-- text --------------+- <gid> -+- AS -+- text-----------.
|
|
|
|
|
------+- EQUIpment text-|
|
|
-- ISOdrawing - <gid> ---------------------------------------------+->
Restrictions:
The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a

CHECK command is 100.
A maximum of 20 CHECK commands are allowed for a single
pipe (sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for any
single pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only check sheets
for a Pipe which has previously been detailed with Repeatability
on, so that split points have been stored in the DESIGN
database. See the REPEATABILITY command. Sheets and
spools can be specified in the same command as normal pipes.
Querying:
Q DETaillist
Shows the current content of the Drawlist.
2:25
12.0

2.3.15
CLLENGTHFILE
Function:
Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with or without

an insulation centreline summary, should be output.
Description:
ISODRAFT can produce two types of summary which can be

output to file:
A pipe centreline length summary
A pipe plus insulation centreline length summary
Note: The materials list can also be output to a file using the
MATLISTFILENAME command.
Examples:
CLLE /FILE1
Produces a pipe centreline length summary only.
CLLE INSU /FILE1

Produces a pipe plus
summary.
insulation centreline length
CLLE INSU /FILE1 OVER

Produces a pipe plus insulation centreline length
summary, overwriting contents of FILE1.
CLLE OFF
Suppresses any further generation of centreline summary
files. This is the default state.
Command Syntax:
>--- CLLEngthfile --+----------------.
|
|
|-- INSUlation --+-- filename --+-- OVER ---.
|
|
|
|
-----------|
|
|
|----- OFF* --------------------------------|
|
|
-------------------------------------------+--->
Restrictions:
Note: That pipe and pipe plus insulation summaries cannot

both be produced in a single run. If either type of file is
specified, the other is suppressed automatically.
Querying:
Q CLLENGTHFILE
2:26
12.0

2.3.16
CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS
Function:
Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected to

nozzles on plant equipment.
Description:
Dotted nozzles can be plotted on isometrics at points where

connections are made to Plant equipment. This command can
only be used for combined or erection-only isometrics.
The default is that nozzles will not be plotted.
Examples:
CONT NOZZles
Plots dotted nozzles.
CONT OFF
Switches dotted nozzle plotting off.
2.3.17
Command Syntax:
>--- CONTinuationsymbols ---+--- NOZZles ---.

|
|
--- OFF * -----+--->
Querying:
Q CONTinuationsymbols
Q OPTIONS
CONTNOTES
Function:
Specifies continuation notes at the end points on drawings for

when the drawing continues onto another isometric (as opposed
to when the drawing continues onto another sheet of the same
isometric).
Description:
The note can include the name of the continuation pipe,

drawing, or both, as defined by the SPOOLER module. If the
termination point on the current isometric is a weld, you can
include a description of the connecting component or tube in the
notes.
Examples:
CONTN PI
Continuation notes show pipe names only.
CONTN BO DESC ON
Continuation notes show both pipe and drawing names, and will
include descriptions for welds of the connecting component.
Command Syntax:
>- CONTNotes -+-- PIpe --.

|
|
|-- DRwg --|
|
|
-- BOth --+- DESCriptions -+-- ON ---.
|
|
|
|
-- OFF --|
|
|
--------------------------+-->
2:27
12.0

2.3.18
CONTSHEETS
Function:
Allows you to specify that the sheet number of the continuation

sheets be shown.
Description:
When an isometric continues onto another sheet the

CONSHEETS commands specifies that the sheet number of
the continuation sheet be shown at the sheet break.
Examples:
CONTSHEETS ON
Continuation sheets numbers between sheets are
switched on.
CONTSHEETS OFF
Continuation sheets numbers between sheets are
suppressed.
An extra clause, ContUdefText (continuation user-defined text),
is available to the CONTSHEETS command to specify that
further pipeline attribute or user-defined attribute (UDA)
information may be shown as part of the continuation sheet
information displayed at sheet breaks. The format of the
constructed text string is controlled by the User and may
contain arbitrary text and carriage returns:
CONTSHEETS ON ContUdefText 'LATTR1'

'arbtext1''LATTR2''arbtext2'''
where LATTR1 and LATTR2 are valid Pipeline attributes and
arbtext1 and arbtext2 are two arbitrary text strings. The sheet
number of the continuation sheet is automatically appended to
the user-specified string. Therefore, the example specified
above would output the string XXXXarbtext1YYYYarbtext2n for
continuation sheet n where XXXX is the value of LATTR1 and
YYYY is the value of LATTR2.
This may be accomplished automatically by a new text box on
the Annotation Options window. In the text box the User is able
to add something like:-
LATRR1'/'LATTR2'-'
where LATRR1 and LATTR2 are valid Pipeline attributes
This will generate XXXX/YYYY-n for sheet n where XXXX

is the value of LATTR1 and YYYY is the value of LATTR2.
A more concrete example of the use of the CONTNOTES,

ContUdefText option (combined with the COORDINATES
option) is as follows. The specified options:
2:28
12.0

Coords ON AT Sheet
ContSheets ON ContUdefText '''Name=''NAME'
'Type=''TYPE''&/Lock=''LOCK'' Owner=''OWNER''
PSPE=''PSPE'' pg'''
will display at the sheet break of an isometric:
E 12250
N 13500
EL +2735
Name =100-C-10 Type=PIPE
Lock= Owner=PIPES PSPE=A3B pg3
The COORDINATES option specifies the output of the first
three lines. The user-defined text occupies the last two lines
because a carriage return '&/' is specified. The value of the
'Lock' attribute is not output because, in this case, it is invalid.
The continuation sheet page 3 specified indicates that this text
would be expected to be located on sheet 2 of an isometric at
the sheet break continuing onto sheet 3.
Note: The CONTSHEETS command must not be confused
with the CONTNOTES command which specifies
continuation notes at the end points on drawings when
the connection goes to another isometric.
Note: A valid non-null string specified by the ContUdefText
option will always be output at sheets breaks,
irrespective of whether the CONTSHEETS option,
specifying whether the continuation sheet number is
displayed or not, is set to ON or OFF.
Command Syntax:
2.3.19
>---CONTSheets---+--ON---.
|
|
--OFF--+--->
CONTWELDS
Function:
Allows you to plot welds on the current isometric that are to

belong to another drawing.
Description:
When an isometric continues onto another sheet and the

connecting item is a weld, you can use the CONTWELDS
command to plot that weld on the current isometric.
When plotted on the current isometric, the continuing weld will
be given a letter identifier instead of a number identifier. This
tells you that the weld actually belongs to another drawing.
Examples:
CONTW ON
Command Syntax:
>---CONTWelds---+--ON---.
|
|
--OFF--+--->
Switches continuation notes for welds on.
2:29
12.0

2.3.20
COORDINATES or COORDS
Function:
Specifies the drawing locations at which spatial coordinates are

to be shown.
Description:
Spatial coordinates are shown on the drawing, by default, at all

pipe termination or connection points. You can stop coordinates
being plotted at specified types of location on the isometric.
Examples:
COORDS OFF
No end coordinates will be shown.
COORDS ON
COORDS DEFAULT
All end coordinates will be shown.
COORDS ON AT PIPE NOZZ VENT

End coordinates will be shown only at pipe continuations,
Nozzle connections and Vents.
COORDS ON AT MISCELLANEOUS
End coordinates will only be shown at end locations which
are not any of the following: Pipe, Nozzle, Open, Clos,
Vent or Dran. For example, coordinates will be shown at
an unconnected flange.
COORDS OFF AT VENT DRAN CLOS

Suppresses coordinates at the specified types of
component. Coordinates will be plotted at all other types of
pipe termination or connection.
COORDS ON AT SHEET
Specify that spatial coordinates are to be shown at sheet
break on the same isometric.
Related
Commands:
ELEVATIONS
Command Syntax:
2:30
12.0

>--+-- COORdinates --.

|
|
-- COORDS --------+-- ON ---.
.-----------------.
|
|
/
|
|-- OFF --+-- AT --*-- PIPE -----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- NOZZle ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- OPEN -----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- CLOSe ----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- VENT -----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- DRAN -----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- SHEET ----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-- MISCellaneous --|
|
|
|
|
----------------------------|
|
|
-- DEFault ---------------------------+-->
Querying:
2.3.21
Q COORdinates
Q COORDS
Q OPTions
CUTBACK
Function:
To make sure there is sufficient length between a pulled bend

and the end of the pipe to be gripped by the bending machine
and that a pipe with a threaded end is long enough to be gripped
by the threading, machine.
Description:
This command adds length to a cut pipe, where necessary, that

will be cut back after the fabrication work is finished. Additional
length will be added to cut pipes where either:
The length between a pulled bend and the end of the pipe is
insufficient to allow the bending machine to grip the pipe.
The length of a pipe that is to have a threaded end is insufficient
to be gripped by the threading machine.
The software checks the distance between the p-arrive or pleave of the pulled bend and the start or end of the pipe (or the
length of the pipe to be threaded). If this is found to be less than
the minimum grip length, the length of pipe required to give this
length is added to the total length of the cut pipe.
Note: If two adjacent bends are closer than the minimum grip
length then a warning message is written into the
message file.
The ATEXTs 186 (CUT START) and 187 (CUT END) are output
to the remarks column of the Cutting List on the isometric, or to
the Special Req. column of the Cut Pipe List File, when
appropriate.
2:31
12.0

The minimum grip length required to handle these pipes

successfully depends on a number of factors, such as: bore
size; pipe material; type of machine; etc. To handle these
varying factors PDMS rules are used.
Examples:
CUTBack 150 ON ALL BEND WITH (SPREF EQ/

name)
This associates the minimum grip length with catalogue
data.
CUTB 2 INCH ON ALL BENDS WITH (ABOR GE 100

AND ABOR LT 200)
This sets a minimum grip length of 2 inches for all bends in
pipes with bores between 100 and 200mm.
CUTB 200 ON ALL BEND

This syntax can be used as the last rule or a catch all to
ensure that all bends have at least a 200mm grip length.
Note: At a bend ISODRAFT will use the first rule it finds for
which the expression is TRUE, therefore the order of the
rules is important.
CUTBack 175 ON THREAD

This ensures that any cut pipe with a threaded end is
always at least 175mm in length.
Command Syntax:
>- CUTBack -+- value - ON -+- ALL BEND -+- WITH - (logical expression) -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
- THREADedends -----------------------------|
|
|
- NONE* ---------------------------------------------------+->
value is the minimum grip length. It may be input in mm or

inches.
logical expression may be any logical PML expression, from the
PML 1 Expression Handler. For more details refer to
expressions in the on-line help. This syntax may be used
repeatedly to build up an unlimited number of rules.
Querying:
Q CUTBack
Outputs a list of defined cutback rules or none if no rules are
defined.
Q CUTBack RULE COUNT

Outputs the number of cutback rules that have been defined.
QCUTBack RULE <int>

Outputs the rule identified by the <int> number.
2:32
12.0

2.3.22
CUTMARKS
Function:
Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall sheet area.
Description:
The CUTMARKS command draws right-angled cut marks at

each corner of the overall sheet area. When multiple plots are
defined on the same drawing sheet, cutting marks will be
superimposed. The default is CUTMARKS OFF
Cut Marks
Cut Marks
Figure 2:1.
The location of cutting marks
Figure 2:2.
Cutting marks on multiple plots
Examples:
CUTMarks ON
CUTMarks OFF
Command Syntax:
>--- CUTMarks ---+--- ON -----.

|
|
--- OFF* ---+--->
Querying:
Q CUTMARKS
Q OPTIONS
2:33
12.0

2.3.23
CUTPIPELISTFILE
Function:
Description:
Outputs a cut pipe list to a file.

A cut pipe report can be output as a comma separated value
(*.csv) file. The information normally output for a pipe is:
Itemcode
Item description and specification
Bore
Cut length
Calculated length (ignoring end preparation allowances

etc.)
Special requirements (e.g. pulled bends, loose flanges,

etc.)
Cut piece number
Pipeline reference
Batch reference, i.e. the Zone name.
End preparations
Spool number
The dimensional units and date format used in the report can be
defined by using the UNITS and DATE commands.
The format of the report file can also be customised to show only
the information you wish to see. This is done by defining a
format file, in comma separated value (*.csv) format, which
reads in the report file and lays it out to your specification. The
format file must contain the following information:
Flags to retain .csv file, create formatted report, create

appware macro
Flags to include Fortran carriage controls, paging, date
File header
File footer
Page length
Order of requested columns
Column titles
Column widths
Columns spacing
The format files can only be created using the appware by

specifying the layout in the isometric option files.
Examples:
CUTPipelistfile /PIPELIST
This writes the list of cut pipes into a file named
PIPELIST, using the standard format.
2:34
12.0

CUTP /FILE1 OVER

Writes the cut pipe list to a file named FILE1, over writing
the existing contents of FILE1.
CUTP OFF
Cut pipe reports are not produced. This is the default.
CUTP /FILE4 OVER FORMATfilename /FORMAT1

Writes the cut pipe report to a file named FILE4 using the
formatting information from file FORMAT1.
Command Syntax:
>- CUTPipelistfile -+- filename -+- OVERwrite --.
|
|
|
|
--------------+- FORMATfilename - name -.
|
|
|
|
-------------------------|
|
|
|- OFF* ----------------------------------------------|
|
|
-----------------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
2.3.24
Q CUTPIPELISTFILE
Q OPTIONS
CUTTINGLIST
Function:
Adds a list of cut pipe lengths to the material list.
Description:
The CUTTINGLIST command adds a list of cut pipe lengths to

the material list. Each separate pipe length is always identified
by:
Its cut piece number, enclosed in angled brackets; e.g. <1>.
The pipe bore.
The cut length in mm (e.g. 2219) or feet and inches (e.g.

72.5/8) depending on the type of units selected (see the
UNITS command).
For pulled bends, the length measured around the centre line of
the tube will be included on the cutting list. The RADI attribute of
the bend must be set.
A length which includes either a loose flange or a field-fit weld
will have a fitting allowance incorporated into the plotted length
(see the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command).
Any special requirements, such as a pulled bend; loose

flange; a field-fit weld or cutback allowance, this will be
highlighted in the remarks column.
2:35
12.0

Additionally you can add the following items to the table
Item code for that pipe.
The end preparations for the pipe, according to the

following list:
PE
Plain
BE
Bevelled
TH
Threaded
SC
Screwed
SA
Saddled end
Note: These codes are Atexts which can be changed.

Note: Where a pipeline is split over more than one drawing, the
cut pipe list on each drawing contains only the pipe
lengths for that sheet. The default is that the numbering
will follow on from the last number on the preceding
drawing. The cut piece numbering sequence can be
restarted from 1 on each continuation drawing by giving
the command CUTTinglist PERDrawing.
Examples:
CUTTinglist ON ITEM OFF

This outputs the cut piece list in the material table and
switches the Item Codes OFF.
CUTT PERD ON
This sets the numbering to per drawing.
CUTT OFF
This switches the Cuttinglist off, but does not delete the
current settings.
CUTT ON
This switches the cutting list output ON, using the current
settings.
Note: The default is Off.
CUTT ON PERD ON ITEM ON ENDP ON

This outputs the cut piece list in the material table with
both the Item Code and End Preparation columns
displayed, with numbering set to per drawing.
Command Syntax:
2:36
12.0

>- CUTTinglist -+- OFF* -+------------------------------------.

|
|
|
+- ON ---|
|
|
| .------------<------------.
|
|
|/
|
|
--------*- PERDrawing ------+- ON --+
|
|
|
|
|
|
- OFF -+
|
|
|
|
|- ITEMcodes -------+- ON --+
|
|
|
|
|
|
- OFF -+
|
|
|
|
|- ENDpreparations -+- ON --+
|
|
|
|
|
|
- OFF -'
|
|
|
-------------------------------------+->
Querying:
2.3.25
Q CUTTinglist
Q OPTions
DATE
Function:
Specifies the format for showing the date in the drawings title
block.
Description:
By default, the date is plotted according to the UK convention.

This can be changed to the European or American format, or
switched off completely.
Examples:
DATE UK
Gives the United Kingdom format:18 OCT 1991
DATE EUR
Gives the European format:18/10/1991
DATE USA
Gives the United States format:10/18/1991
DATE OFF
Switches the date off.
Command Syntax:
>--- DATE ---+--- UK* ----.

|
|
|--- EUR ----|
|
|
|--- USA ----|
|
|
|--- OFF ----|
|
|
------------+--->
Querying:
Q DATE
Q OPTions
2:37
12.0

2.3.26
DELETE
Function:
Deletes an SKEY definition from a symbol library.
Description:
There are two forms of the command, depending on whether the

SKEY is a standard one or a user-defined one.
Examples:
DELEte OLDKey keyname

Deletes a standard SKEY definition.
DELEte NEWKey keyname

Deletes a user-defined SKEY definition.
2.3.27
Related
Commands:
SKEY
Command Syntax:
>--- DELEte ---+--- OLDKey keyname ---.

|
|
--- NEWKey keyname ---+--->
DELIMITER
Function:
Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as the

itemcode suffix delimiter.
Description:
Identical components can be distinguished by having a suffix

added to their SPREFs. ISODRAFT normally removes suffixes
from itemcodes in the material list by recognising the delimiter
character which separates the suffix from the rest of the SPREF.
The default suffix code delimiter is the colon (:). A component
with an SPREF of /A1A/TEE.50X50:X will normally appear on
the material list with the itemcode TEE.50X50.
Examples:
Note: The specification

automatically.
name
DELIMITER
AT
Specifies
DELIMITER
COLON
Specifies
symbol.
DELIMITER
PLUS
Specifies
symbol.
DELIMITER
DOT
Specifies
symbol.
DELIMITER
AND
Specifies
&
symbol.
2:38
/A1A/
is
also
removed
symbol.
12.0

2.3.28
Command Syntax:
>--- DELImiter ---+--|

|--|
|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q DELImiter
Q OPTions
ATsymbol -------.
|
COLONsymbol* ---|
|
PLUSsymbol -----|
|
DOTsymbol ------|
|
ANDsymbol ------+--->
DETAIL
Function:
Generates and plots isometric drawings and material lists.
Description:
The DETAIL command followed by one or more element

identifiers processes the elements given, and produces the
isometric drawings and any other reports requested.
The default hierarchy level for plotting on a single isometric
drawing is: a Pipe from the DESIGN database or a spool
drawing from the Fabrication database. Branches or spools/
fields can be plotted individually and system isometrics, from a
higher level in the database, can also be output.
More than one pipe or spool drawing can be specified in a single
DETAIL command. The pipes can be specified individually, as a
high-level element or group, or as members of the Detail List
(see the ADD and REMOVE commands).
If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, the split points and
spool identifiers can be stored in the DESIGN database. In this
case, individual sheets and spools can be added to the Detail
List. See the REPEATABILITY command.
Note: If MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute of a pipe
is set to TRUE when it is detailed, ISODRAFT will not
detail the pipe again unless MARK IGNORE ON has
been specified.
The capability to DETAIL Pipe Spools (PSPOOLs) and Pipe
Spool Lists (PSLISTs) is available in Isodraft.
All of the functionality available to DETAIL PIPEs and
BRANCHes in earlier versions of Isodraft is now also available
to DETAIL PSPOOLs and PSLISTs. Such PSPOOLs and
PSLISTs are created in the Pipe Production Checks utility in the
Design module and, after their creation, they are visible beneath
the owning pipe in the Design Explorer. Then they are
subsequently also visible in the Design Explorer in the Isodraft
module. The PSPOOL or PSLIST may be made the Current
Element (CE) and then DETAILed in the usual way.
2:39
12.0

A second way in which PSPOOLs and PSLISTs may be

DETAILed is by making them members of the Detaillist. This is
accomplished using the usual ADD/REMOVE commands which
are already available for adding and removing Pipe and Branch
elements of the Detaillist.
System Isometrics
Normally, ISODRAFT processes each pipeline or spool drawing
separately. Pipes, or spool drawings, which are connected can
be detailed as a complete, named, system isometric. For
example:
DETAIL
CE
AS
System Name
Note: You cannot mix DESIGN and Fabrication database

elements in the same system isometric.
The system name is plotted, by default, in the pipeline reference
box in the bottom right-hand corner of the drawing. The
individual pipe names, along with their material and other
specifications, are plotted at the change point.
If any specification is unchanged throughout the system, it will
be output in the title block in the same way as a normal
isometric. If a system consists of only one pipe, its name will be
added to the title block.
The material control file and material list will be produced for the
whole system isometric. It is not possible to produce a
breakdown of materials for an individual pipeline, nor will the
material files include any pipeline header information.
Note: No information is written to the support file for a system
isometric.
Equipment Trims
Although unconnected items cannot be drawn automatically as
part of a system isometric, vessel or equipment trim drawings
comprising a drawing frame, user-positioned text and a material
list can be produced for material take off using the DETAIL AS
EQUIPMENT option. The graphical part of the drawing can then
be added separately, e.g. as an underlay plot generated in
DRAFT.
Groups of components such as blanking flanges, level gauges,
relief valves, etc., can be modelled on the basis of one Pipe per
Nozzle, or per group of Nozzles if connected (such as a level
gauge piped between two Nozzles). Disconnected branches in
the same pipe on different nozzles cannot be grouped. The
collection of pipes can then be detailed as equipment trim.
In the material list, equipment trim items will be grouped under
headings of the form
NOZZLE REF - A.
2:40
12.0

By default, item numbering for equipment trims in the material

list will start at 1 for each Nozzle. To concatenate the lists so that
the numbering is continuous throughout the sequence of
Nozzles, use the EQUIPMENTNUMBERING command.
A split ATTA (that is, an ATTY set to SSSS) positioned at the Tail
of an equipment trim Branch will cause a multiple sheet drawing
to be produced. Such an ATTA should be positioned so that the
split comes between two Nozzle groupings.
It is not possible to obtain a cut pipe list on an equipment trim
isometric. Cut pipe lists have pointers to individual lengths on
the drawing and so, since equipment trim isometrics are for
material take off only (with no drawing), a cut pipe list would not
be meaningful.
Examples:
DETAIL /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1

Plots named elements only.
DETAIL ALL
Plots the current Detail List.
DETAIL /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS REFINER

Plots the two sites as a single system iso with the drawing
title REFINER.
DETAIL SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2

Replots sheet 2 of PIPE-2.
Note: If a dimension is continued on another sheet, the other
sheet will be replotted as well, so that the dimensioning
information is correct.
DETAIL SHEETN SING /PIPE2

Replots the iso for /PIPE-2 on a single sheet
DETAIL /SPLDRG-2
Plots spool drawing 2 of the Fabrication database.
DETAIL PSPOOL2 OF PSLIST1 OF PIPE /0130001-A150-100

Plots a single PSPOOL.
DETAIL PSLIST1 OF PIPE /011-0001-A150-100

Plots a PSPOOL list.
Related
Commands:
ADD
CHECK
REMOVE
SPOOLNUMBERS
Command Syntax:
2:41
12.0

.--------------------------------------------.
/
|
>- DETail -*- <gid> --------------------------------------|
|
|
|- ALL ----------------------------------------|
|
|
|- SHEETNumber -+- integer -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
- SINGle --+-------.
|
|
|
|
- SPOOl -+- integer -+-OF integer -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
--------------|
|
|
|
|
- text -------------------+- <gid> -+- AS -- text ------.
|
|
|
---------+- EQUIpment text --+->
Note: The Spool branch in this syntax diagram refers only to

spools from the DESIGN database, not Spool Drawings
from the SPOOLER module, which you plot using the
normal DETAIL command.
Restrictions:

DETAIL command is 100.
A maximum of 20 DETAIL commands are allowed for a single
pipe (sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for any
single pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only add sheet and
spools for a Pipe which has previously been detailed with
Repeatability on, so that split points and spool identifiers have
been stored in the DESIGN database. See the REPEATABILITY
command. Normal pipes can be detailed alongside replots.
Querying:
2.3.29
Q DEtaillist
Shows the current content of the Draw List.
DIMDIST
Function:
Specifies distance between dimensioning lines and pipe/

component centrelines on the isometric plot (standout distance).
Normally used to avoid overplotting lines on a complex
isometric.
Description:
The default standout distances are: string dimensions 11mm;

overall dimensions 16mm; support dimensions 6mm.
Note: These standout values may not be set to the same value.
Also the skewbox standout distances for dimension lines
cannot be set to these values and vice versa.
Examples:
DIMDIST STRING 15
Sets standout distance for string/composite dimensions to
15mm.
DIMDIST STRING 0.5 INCH

Sets standout distance to 0.5 inch.
2:42
12.0

DIMDIST SUPPORTS 10
Sets support dimensioning standout distance to 10mm.
DIMDIST OVERALL 12
Sets overall dimensioning standout distance to 12mm
Related
Commands:
DIMENSIONS SUPPORT SKEWBOX
Command Syntax:
>--- DIMDist ---+--- STRING* ----.

|
|
|--- OVERall ---|
|
|
--- SUPPorts ---+--- value -----.
|
|
--- DEFAULT ---+--->
where value is the standout distance.

Querying:
2.3.30
Q DIMDist
Q OPTions
DIMLABELS
Function:
Specifies the appearance of dimension labels.
Description:
The DIMLABELS commands allows you to control if dimension

labels are displayed on isometrics within the dimension line or
above the dimension line.
Examples:
DIMLABEL IN
Dimension labels are shown within the dimension line
(default).
DIMLABEL ABOVE
Dimension labels are shown above the dimension line.
Command Syntax:
>--- DIMLabels ---+--- IN ----.

|
|
--- ABOVE -+---->
where value is the standout distance.
2:43
12.0

2.3.31
DIMENSIONS
Function:
Specifies dimensioning style.
Description:
The basic options for detailed dimensioning are either string or

composite dimensions.
String dimensioning gives the maximum amount of detail, since
it shows both the lengths of individual components and their
relative positions. For assembly purposes (fabrication and
erection) string dimensioning often gives more detail than is
strictly necessary and composite dimensioning can be specified.
String dimensions, which are plotted by default, are measured
sequentially from each relevant point to the next. The relevant
points are:
The start or end of a branch.
Changes of direction (bends, elbows, etc).
Component connection points (flanges, welds, screwed and

compression joints etc, excluding gaskets).
Composite dimensions ignore dimensions over which the
fabricator has no control, particularly the sizes of individual
components. Components which are directly connected to the
each other are therefore dimensioned as though they constitute
a single composite item.
Only non-flanged components, that is, those with welded,
screwed or compression fittings, are considered as connected
when calculating composite dimensions. Flanges are always
treated as breaks in the pipeline and dimensioned separately.
Fittings which are attached to pipe only at one end are treated
as composite with the fitting at the other end. Fittings which are
attached to pipe at both ends are dimensioned to the arrive ppoint, with two exceptions:
Reducers are dimensioned to the larger end;
Tees are dimensioned to the centreline of the off branch.
Composite dimensions are always broken at a Tee or Olet

intersection point.
You can display overall dimensions in addition to string or
composite dimensions. The default standout for overall
dimensions is 16mm. Overall dimensions are taken:
From the start of a branch to the first change of direction
From each change of direction to the next
From the last change of direction to the end of a branch
From the start of a falling section skew-box to the end of

the skew-box.
Between Branch connections.
2:44
12.0

~
(a) String dimensions
(b) Composite dimensions
~
(c) Overall dimensions
Figure 2:3.
Dimensioning Methods
Bore sizes will be marked where any confusion might otherwise

arise; e.g. at reducers, reducing fittings, tees, crosses, etc.
You can also specify:
Whether or
connections;
not
overall
dimensions
Dimensioning to Valve centrelines.
cross
Branch
By default, support/hanger dimensions are on the same side

as string dimensions, but they can be on the opposite side. The
default standout for support/hanger dimensions is 6mm.
The default settings are:
String dimensioning
dimensioning off);
on
(and,
Overall dimensioning off;
Support dimensioning on;
Valve centreline dimensioning off;
therefore,
composite
Support/hanger dimensions shown alongside other pipeline

dimensions.
2:45
12.0

Examples:
DIME ON
Produces isometrics which are fully annotated in string
format, with both piping and support dimensions. This is
the default setting.
DIME OFF
Produces isometrics with no dimensions plotted.
DIME COMP ON
Produces isometrics with composite dimensions over
connected fittings.
DIME COMP OFF

Produces isometrics with string format dimensions,
assuming that dimensioning is still on.
DIME OVER ON
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions on
(independent of current setting of string/composite
options).
DIME OVER CEN

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to Valve
centrelines and Branch connections (in addition to string
dimensions).
DIME OVER CENT ONLY

Produces isometrics with overall centreline dimensions
only.
DIME OVER ON STOP

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions stopping at
branch connections.
DIME OVER ON ACR

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions across
branch connections.
DIME OVER CENT STOP

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valve
centrelines, stopping at branch connections.
DIME OVER CENT ACR

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valve
centrelines and across branch connections.
DIME OVER CRIT

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to critical
components.
2:46
12.0

DIME SUPP
Produces isometrics with support dimensions only.
DIME DEFAULT
Resets the dimensioning style to its default state.
Note: That standout distances may not be set to the same
value.
Related
Commands:
DIMDIST SUPPORT TRUNCATE
Restrictions:
Overall dimensioning can be specified in addition to string or

composite dimensioning, but an overall dimension will not be
shown if it is the same as a string or composite dimension.
Instruments Tees cannot be included within overall dimensions.
When a Tee or Olet is encountered with its arrive p-point in a
branch leg, an overall dimension may not be given for the main
branch.
Command Syntax:
>- DIMEnsions -+|
||
||
||
||
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-
Querying:
ON -----------------------------------------------------------.
|
OFF ----------------------------------------------------------|
|
SUPport ------------------------------------------------------|
|
DEFault ------------------------------------------------------|
|
COMPosite -+- ON --.
|
|
|
|
- OFF -+------------------------------------------|
|
OVERall -+- ON ------------------.
|
|
|
|
|- CENTreline -+- ONLY -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
--------+- STOPping -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- ACRoss ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
------------+- BRANch ------|
|
|
|
|
|- CONNections -|
|
|
|
|
---------------|
|
|
|- CRITical -+- ONLY -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
--------+------------------------------|
|
|
- OFF ----------------------------------------------|
|
HANGers -+- OPPosite --.
|
|
|
|
- ALONgside -+- STRings ---------------------------+>
Q DIMEnsions
Q OPTions
2:47
12.0

2.3.32
DISTANCES
Function:
Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of lengths

and distances.
Description:
The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units which
are assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) are
normally derived from the Catalogue. You can change the
default units independently for input of pipe bores and/or
distances along pipelines or across components by using the
related DISTANCES and BORES commands.
Note: That the UNITS command is used to set output units.
The current default units may be overridden for any specific item
of input data by giving the units explicitly. For example: 5mm.
Examples:
MM DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in mm unless
otherwise specified.
INCH DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in inches
unless otherwise specified.
FINCH DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in feet and
inches unless otherwise specified (e.g. 56 represents 5ft
6in).
Related
Commands:
BORES
Command Syntax:
>---+--|
|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q UNIts
MILlimetre ---.
|
MM -----------|
|
FInch --------|
|
INch ---------+--- BOres -------.
|
|
--- DIstances ---+--->
2:48
12.0

2.3.33
DTEXTS
Function:
Controls the material description part of item descriptions
Description:
A complete item description in a material list consists of the

geometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXT
element) and the material description (derived from the
attributes of an MTEXT element).
The text in MTEXT and DTEXT elements is defined in
PARAGON by setting the attributes of MTEXT and DTEXT to
the text required. Both elements have three attributes which can
contain text:
The three attributes of DTEXT are RTEXT, STEXT and

TTEXT;
The three attributes of MTEXT are XTEXT, YTEXT and

ZTEXT.
The default attributes whose text will be displayed on the

material list are RTEXT and XTEXT. If the other attributes have
been set in the DESIGN database, you can choose to display
the STEXT or TTEXT using the DTEXT command, and the
YTEXT or ZTEXT using the MTEXT command.
The DTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress the
geometric description completely.
Using different attributes can be used, for example, to store
descriptions in different languages.
Examples:
DTEXts Stext
Sets the description to the text held in the STEXT attribute.
DTEXts Ttext
Sets the description to the text held in the TTEXT attribute.
DTEXts Rtext
Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute.
This is the default.
Related
Commands:
MATERIALLIST MTEXTS
Command Syntax:
>--- DTEXts ---+--|

|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q DTEXT
Q OPTions
2:49
Rtext* ---.
|
Stext ----|
|
Ttext ----|
|
IGNORE ---+--->
12.0

2.3.34
ELEVATION
Function:
Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be shown

on isometrics.
Description:
By default, elevations are shown on isometrics at all intersection

points where there is a change of elevation. You can change this
as shown in the following examples.
Examples:
ELEVation VERTIcal
Outputs elevations only on vertical sections of pipe (i.e.
linear dimensions are omitted).
ELEVation VERTical AND DIMEnsions

Outputs both elevations and dimensions on vertical
sections of pipe.
ELEVation INTERsections
Resets the default condition so that elevations are only
shown at intersection points where there is a change of
elevation, and dimensions are shown on vertical sections
of Pipe.
Related
Commands:
COORDINATES
COORDS
DIMENSIONS
Command Syntax:
>-- ELEVation --+-- INTERsections* ----------------------------.
|
|
-- VERTical ------+-- AND --.
|
|
|
|
|---------+-- DIMEnsions --|
|
|
----------------------------+-->
Querying:
2.3.35
Q ELEVation
Q OPTions
EQUIPMENTNUMBERING
Function:
Controls numbering of items in the material list for an equipment

trim isometric.
Description:
Item numbering in the material list can start at 1 for each Nozzle,
which is the default, or the numbering can be sequential for all
Nozzles.
2:50
12.0

Examples:
EQUIPMENTN LIST
Numbering is continuous through the sequence of
Nozzles.
EQUIPMENTN NOZZ
Resets to the default, with each Nozzle having its own
separate numbering sequence.
Command Syntax:
>--- EQUIPMENTNumbering ---+--- NOZZle* ---.

|
|
--- LIST ------+--->
Querying:
Q EQUIPMENTNumbering
Note: Minimum abbreviation for querying.
Q OPTions
2.3.36
FALLINGLINES
Function:
Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline before it is

shown as a skew on the isometric plot.
Description:
Amounts of fall less than the current fall limit are shown by a
wedge-shaped symbol on the pipe, together with a note giving
the rate of fall. The wedge-shaped symbols are known as fall
arrows. Amounts of fall greater than the current limit are shown
as boxed skews. You can change the limit, and the units in
which it is expressed.
EL +25000
EL +1200
EL +1130
FALL 1_
EL +24600
Falling line shown as skew
Figure 2:4.
Falling line shown by fall arrow
Different ways of showing falling lines.
2:51
12.0

The default accuracy to which ISODRAFT will report the fall is

as follows:
Degrees to the nearest half degree
Ratio to the nearest 1 up to 30; to the nearest 5 above 30
Percentage to the nearest 1%
Grads to the nearest half grad
Metric inclination to the nearest 10mm per metre
Imperial inclination to the nearest 1/16 per foot
Note: That if the slope is less than 1:500 (or its equivalent in
degrees, etc) the fall note will not be output.
You can specify different accuracy values for reporting the fall
using the ACCURACYLEVEL value command (where value can
be zero, 1 or 2). The accuracies you can specify are:
value (for each

representation)
degrees
default
0.1
0.01
ratio
default
1 always
1 always
percentage
default
0.1
0.01
grads
default
0.1
0.01
metric
default
1mm/m
0.1mm/m
imperial
default
/16/10
/16/100
If you set an accuracy level and then wish to go back to the

default
settings,
you
must
give
an
appropriate
ACCURACYLEVEL command with a value of zero.
If the fall units are specified but the value of the fall limit is
omitted, the following default values will be used. These
correspond to approximately the same slope:
FALL DEG
will default to
FALL DEG 5
i.e. 5 degrees
FALL RAT
will default to
FALL RAT 11
i.e. a ratio of 1:11
FALL PER
will default to
FALL PER 9
i.e. a slope of 9%
FALL GRA
will default to
FALL GRA 5
i.e. 5 grads
2:52
12.0

FALL MET
will default to
FALL MET 80
i.e. 80mm
metre
per
FALL IMP
will default to
FALL IMP 1
i.e. 1/16 inch per

foot
The overall default setting, if no fall units or limit are specified, is

FALL DEG 5.
Where a falling section includes an in-line component, such as a
Valve or Reducer, the FALL message will appear only once,
against the first section of the slope. Where a falling section
incorporates a Tee, the FALL message will be shown twice, on
both sides of the Tee.
3 X 3" NS
EL +1200
3 X 3" NS
FALL 1_
EL +1163
FALL 1_
2010
600
EL +1130
203
1093
Figure 2:5.
Examples:
Falls in sections of pipe containing components.
FALL RATIO 20
Sets fall limit to 1:20
FALL RATIO
Resets fall limit to ratio default of 1:11.
FALL
PERCENT 2
Sets fall limit to 2%.
FALL
PERCENT
Resets fall limit to percentage default of 9%.
FALL OFF
All falls shown as boxed skews; fall symbol

not used at all.
FALL 1.4 DEG
Sets fall limit to 1.5 degrees.
FALL RAT 1:40
Sets fall limit to 1:40.
FALL
2.7%
PER
Sets fall limit to 3% (to nearest per cent).
FALL
1.6
GRAD
2:53
Sets fall limit to 1.5 grad.
12.0

Related
Commands:
FALL MET 30
Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m.
FALL IMP 5/16
Sets fall limit to an imperial incline of 5/16 per

ft.
FALL MET 30
ACC 1
Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m

with a reporting accuracy of 1mm per metre.
ANGLEACCURACY
ZEROLENGTHSKEWS
FALLSKEWS
SKEWBOX
Command Syntax:
2.3.37
>- FALLinglines -+|

||
||
||
||
||
|
|
|
|
-
DEG --------.
|
RATio ------|
|
PERcentage -|
|
GRAds ------|
|
IMPerial ---|
|
METric -----+- value --.
|
|
|
|- ACCuracylevel value -.
|
|
|
----------+-----------------------|
|
OFF -------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q FALLinglines
Q OPTions
FALLSKEWS
Function:
Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling

pipelines are shown.
Description:
Dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling pipelines are by

default shown by 3D skewboxes, that is boxes showing the
horizontal skew and the fall. Skewed and falling pipelines with
rates of fall less than the current fall (set by the FALLINGLINES
command) can be shown as a 2D skewbox for the horizontal
skew and a fall indicator showing the amount of fall.
Skewboxes can be suppressed completely for branches
containing less than a specified number of components. Skew
box suppression applies only until a change of direction is
encountered.
Examples:
FALLSkews THREEDbox ON
Displays skewed and falling lines with 3D boxes. This is
the default.
2:54
12.0

FALLSkews TWODbox ON
Displays skewed and falling lines with 2D boxes for the
horizontal skew and a FALL indicator giving the amount of
fall.
FALLSkews TWODbox OFF 4

Displays skews as 2D boxes (with FALL indicators), but
omits boxes on branch legs which have four or less
components.
Note: This component count excludes gaskets but includes
each length of implied tubing. The number of
components must be between 1 and 50 inclusive.
Related
Commands:
FALLINGLINES OVERALLSKEWS SKEWBOX

ZEROLENGTHSKEWS
Command Syntax:
>--- FALLSkews ---+--- THREEDbox ---.
|
|
--- TWODbox -----+--- ON --------------.
|
|
|--- OFF --- value ---|
|
|
---------------------+--->
2.3.38
FILE
Function:
Specifies the name of a PLOT file to which ISODRAFTs

isometric drawing output is to be sent. The FILE command can
also be used to output a file in dxf format (if you needed to
transfer the plot to another program, for example). If Kanji output
is required, the FILE command also allows you to specify the dxf
file as SHIFTJIS format (mostly used on IBM PCs) or EUC
format (used on most other machines). You can produce dxf
files either instead of the plot file, or as well as the plot file.
Details of outputting .dxf format files to MicroStation are given in
Appendix D.
Description:
The FILE command specifies the name of the plot file for
ISODRAFT output. ISODRAFT adds a three-digit number,
jumping over any numbers which already exist. If DXF output is
requested, the suffix .dxf will be added after the number.
Note: The numbering ignores the .dxf suffix. For example, if a
file named /PLOT001 exists, the next file created will be /
PLOT002 or /PLOT002.dxf.
2:55
12.0

If the same file command is used to produce a plot file and DXF
file, they will both have the same numeric suffix. For example, if
the last plot file was /PLOT004 and the last DXF file was /
PLOT002.dxf, and a plot file and DXF file are both required for
the next DETAIL command, the output will be /PLOT005 and /
PLOT005.dxf.
By default, each DETAIL command will produce one plot file. If
several pipes are specified in a DETAIL command, you can
specify that each plot will be in a separate file.
If a pipe is too complicated to be shown on one plot, or if you
have specified that the pipe should be split over more than one
sheet, separate plot files can be produced. If you want the plot
file to contain more than one drawing you can specify a multiple
plot file, and in this case you can also specify the length of paper
available. ISODRAFT will automatically create a new multiple
plot file when the paper length has been exceeded.
The PDMS limitation on plotting size is 3275mm square and this
cannot be exceeded in either single or multiple file mode.
Examples:
FILE /P250-BDF
Specifies the filename /P250-BDF. Plot files will be named
/P250-BDF001, /P250-BDF002, etc.
FILE AND DXF /P250-BDF

Specifies the filename /P250-BDF for both the plot file and
the dxf file.
FILE DXF EUC /P250-BDF

Specifies that the plot file will be in DXF EUC format. The
suffix .dxf is added to the filename automatically. Note that
on VAX, this will override the normal VAX filename
extension.
FILE /PLOT MULT

Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multiple
plots. This is the default.
FILE /PLOT MULT 2000

Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multiple
plots, and gives the maximum length of paper.
Command Syntax:
2:56
12.0

>- FILE -+- AND -.

|
|
+-------+- DXF -.
|
|
|
|
'-------+- SHIFTjis -.
|
|
|
|
+- EUC ------|
|
|
|
|
'------------|
|
|
'----------------------------+- filename -+- SINGle --------------.
|
|
|-- MULTIple -+- value -|
|
|
|
|
'---------|
|
|
|
|
'-----------------------+->
where value is the maximum length of the plotters paper roll in

millimetres.
Querying:
2.3.39
Q OUTPUT
Q OPTIONS
FLOWARROWS
Function:
Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots.
Description:
Flow arrows are normally shown for inline components. Inline

flow arrows can also be plotted in any length of tube if an
attachment point (ATTA) with its ATTY attribute set to FLOW has
been created in the DESIGN module. You can also instruct
ISODRAFT to include automatic flow arrows by using the
AUTOMATIC command.
The AUTOMATIC command uses the value of the branch
FLOWDIRECTION attribute described in Data Model Reference
Manual.
The settings for FLOWD are:
BACK for flow from tail to head
FORW for flow from head to tail.
OFF to allow the arrows to be turned off
BOTH to indicate a two-way flow.
Any other setting will continue to be treated as FORWard.
Automatic flow arrows are output for each branch, and at each
multi-way component, provided that a length of implied tube is
available to take the arrow. The automatic flow arrows option will
also output any FLOW ATTAs.
2:57
12.0

By default, the inline flow arrow option is set to off, so that flow
arrows for tube are not normally shown.
Each type can be plotted independently, and the inline flow
arrows can be scaled.
By default the arrows point in the direction HEAD to TAIL; i.e.
FORWARD. They can be reversed by changing the branch
FLOW attribute to BACKWARD.
Examples:
FLOWarrows ON
Flow arrows will be plotted for components.
FLOWarrows OFF
Flow arrows will not be plotted for components.
FLOWarrows INline ON
Flow arrows will be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.
FLOWarrows INline OFF

Flow arrows will not be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.
FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10

Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10. The
default scale factor is 8. The scale must be an integer
between 5 and 15 inclusive.
FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10 AUTO

Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10 and
added automatically. The default scale factor is 8. The
scale must be an integer between 5 and 15 inclusive.
Command Syntax:
.---------------------<----------------------.
/
|
>- FLOWarrows --+------------+-- ON* --------------------------|
|
|
|
|
-- OFF --------------------------|
|
|
-- INline --+-- ON ------------.
|
|
|
|
|-- SCAle-integer--+- AUTOmatic --|
|
|
|
|
--------------|
|
|
-- OFF* -------------------------+-->
Querying:
Q FLOWarrows
Q OPTions
2:58
12.0

2.3.40
FRAME
Function:
Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text are to be

drawn.
Description:
By default, ISODRAFT plots a frame around the complete

drawing within the predefined margins, together with separating
lines between the different areas. Frame text and line summary
symbols are also plotted.
The FRAME command allows you to switch these features off or
on.
2.3.41
Related
Commands:
CUTMARKS
MARGIN
Command Syntax:
>--- FRAMe ---+--- ON* ---.

|
|
--- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q FRAMe
Q OPTions
INSTALL SETUP
Function:
Produces the screen layout stored in a file created by the

RECREATE command.
Description:
On workstations, you can use the RECREATE command to

save the screen layout, which can then be read in again using
the INSTALL SETUP command.
Examples:
RECReate /DISP
Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.
INSTALL SETUP /DISP

Restores the screen display stored in the file /DISP.
2.3.42
Related
Commands:
RECREATE
Command Syntax:
>--- INSTALL SETUP filename --->
INSTNAME
2:59
12.0

Function:
Description:
Controls two options relating to the display of Instruments:
Defines whether SPREFs or PDMS names are to be used

as itemcodes for instruments in the material list.
Allows you to identify instruments on the isometric plot by

tagging them with their names enclosed in circles
(balloons).
By default, an instrument is identified in the material list by

having its SPREF as its itemcode. You can specify instead that
the instruments name will be appended to its description,
because an instrument reference may require more characters
than the itemcode format permits. In this case the itemcode
column will be left blank.
When an instrument is referenced by name, the name can be
displayed in a circular balloon next to the plotted symbol on the
isometric. By default, instruments are not tagged with their
names in balloons, even if they are identified by name in the
material list. The size of the balloon is given by specifying the
maximum number of characters per line of text in the balloon.
Examples:
INSTN NAME
Instruments identified in material list by names appended
to descriptions. The itemcode column is left blank
(default).
INSTN SPREF
Instruments identified in material list by using SPREFs as
itemcodes.
INSTN NAME WITH BALL OFF

Instruments identified in material list by name, but without
tagging with name balloons on plot.
INSTN NAME WITH BALLOONS SIZE 4

Identifies all instrument symbols on the isometric with
balloons containing the instrument names in a 4characters-per-line format.
Related
Commands:
TAGGING
Command Syntax:
2:60
12.0

>- INSTName -+- NAMe* -+- WITH -.

|
|
|
|
|--------+- BALLoons -+- SIZE - integer -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
- OFF ------------|
|
|
|
|
----------------------------------------|
|
|
- SPRef ------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
2.3.43
Q INSTNAME
Q OPTions
INSULATIONCONTROL
Function:
Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted.
Description:
Any piping component which has its ISPEC attribute set may be
shown insulated. The start and end points of insulated
components will be shown on the isometric.
Insulation and tracing can be shown:
On tubing only
On tubing and pipe components
The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will be

shown in the title block.
Examples:
INSU ON
Display insulation.
INSU TUBE
Show insulation on the tube only, not on the

pipe components.
INSU ALL
Show insulation
components.
INSU OFF
Suppress the display of insulation.
on
both
tube
and
The default is INSULATIONCONTROL TUBE.

Related
Commands:
TRACINGCONTROL
Command Syntax:
>------ INSUlationcontrol ----+---|

|---|
|---|
----
Querying:
Q INSUlationcontrol
Q OPTions
2:61
ON* ----.
|
TUBE ---|
|
ALL ----|
|
OFF ----+--->
12.0

2.3.44
ISO
Function:
Defines the view direction to be used for generating the

isometric plot.
Description:
The ISO command defines which of the four standard isometric

viewing directions will be used for the isometric plot. An arrow is
placed on the plot to show north.
The BOX option will plot a box round the north arrow.
The default view direction is ISO 3 (i.e. North at the top left-hand
corner of the drawing).
Examples:
ISO 1
North at bottom right-hand corner
ISO 2
North at top right-hand corner
ISO 3 *
North at top left-hand corner
ISO 4
North at bottom left-hand corner
ISO 4 BOX
North at bottom left-hand corner, with a box

round the arrow
Command Syntax:
>--- ISO --- value ---+-----------.

|
|
--- BOX ---+--->
where value is 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Querying:
2.3.45
Q ISO
Q OPTions
ISOTYPE
Function:
Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication information,

erection information, or both.
Description
The ISOTYPE command specifies whether the information on

the drawing is intended for:
In-shop fabrication and on-site erection
In-shop fabrication
On-site erection
In-shop fabrication of pipe spools
A combined fabrication-erection isometric is a fully

dimensioned and annotated isometric drawing with a material
list specifying all piping components, bolts etc. This is the
default.
2:62
12.0

A fabrication-only isometric is similar to the combined format

except that the following information is omitted:
The coordinates of Plant locations
Erection materials
CONNected TO and CONTinued ON comments at pipeline

ends
The erection-only isometric is similar to the combined format

except that all fabrication materials, apart from loose flanges,
are omitted from the materials list.
A spool isometric only shows fabrication information. Loose
flanges will be included on spools, with the note tack weld only,
if they have a SHOP attribute set to TRUE.
ISODRAFT automatically allocates spool break points at flanges
or flanged components, field welds and erection materials, that
is items with their SHOP flag set to FALSE.
All components, including Tube, must have their SHOP
attributes set to TRUE if spool break points are to be correctly
allocated. (The default setting for tube is FALSE, which would
cause lengths of implied tube to be omitted when ISODRAFT
calculates spool dimensions.)
A spool number, automatically allocated by ISODRAFT, will be
plotted after the pipeline reference in the title block of each
drawing. For example,
100-A-8 SPL[1].
A separate isometric drawing will be produced for each pipe

spool.
Sheets with Blank Drawing Areas. Any type of the isometric
can be produced with the actual drawing area left blank, that is,
only the material list will be plotted.
If ISOTYPE NONE is specified, no plot will be produced. You
must specify output to text files, such as a material list, to get
any output at all.
Command Syntax:
2:63
12.0

>-- ISOType --+-- COMBined* --+-- ERECtion ------.

|
|
|
|
|-- FABrication ---|
|
|
|
|
------------------|
|
|
|-- ERECtion --+-- FABrication ----|
|
|
|
|
-------------------|
|
|
|-- FABrication -------------------|
|
|
|-- SPOOl -------------------------+-- NOPicture ---.
|
|
|
|
----------------|
|
|
--- NONe ------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
2.3.46
Q ISOType
Q OPTions
ITEMCODE (1)
Function:
Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their itemcodes on

the isometric drawing.
Description:
By default, itemcodes for piping components are shown only in

the material list.
For in-line fittings of generic types INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM,
TRAP or VENT, you can specify that itemcodes are also shown
against the corresponding component symbols on the isometric
plot.
You can also specify that itemcodes are not to be shown at all.
Examples:
ITEM INST TRAP ON

Itemcodes for Instruments and Traps shown against
plotted symbols and in material list; codes for all other
component types shown in material list only.
ITEM TRAP VENT OFF

Itemcodes for Traps and Vents not shown at all; codes for
all other component types shown in material list only.
ITEM ALL ON
Itemcodes for all valid component types shown against
plotted symbols and in mate Itemcodes for all types of
component shown in material list only.
ITEM OFF
Itemcodes are shown only in the material list.
Related
Commands:
TAGGING
2:64
12.0

Command Syntax:
.--------<--------.
/
|
>--- ITEMcode ---*--- fittingtype --|
|
|
--- ALL ----------+--- ON --------.
|
|
|--- OFF* ------|
|
|
--- DEFault ---+--->
where fittingtype is any of INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, or

VENT.
Querying:
2.3.47
Q ITEMCODE
Q OPTions
ITEMCODE (2)
Function:
Specifies whether or not specification names are to be included

in material list itemcodes, and whether items which have the
same itemcode except for the specification name and suffix are
treated as the same item.
Description:
By default, itemcodes shown in the material list do not include

the name of the Specification from which the material data has
been extracted. This is known as a short itemcode. The
ITEMCODE LENGTH command allows you to use the full
SPCOM, which includes the SPEC name but excludes the
suffix, as the itemcode.
By default, ISODRAFT removes any itemcode suffixes before
comparing itemcodes for totalling in the material list. The
SEPARATE option allows itemcodes to be compared before the
specification name and suffix are removed, thus allowing
itemcodes to be listed separately with different descriptions.
You can set up multiple itemcodes for elements in the DESIGN
database by creating user-defined attributes (UDAs) for the
SPCOM of the element. For bolts, the UDAs are created as
attributes of a DTAB element. You can then use the ITEMCODE
command to specify that the itemcode should be taken from a
UDA instead of from the SPCOM.
The Item Code for a Support may be derived from a Standard
Text Attribute, Text UDA or Property of the ATTA itself rather
than from its SPCOM.
2:65
12.0

Examples:
ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG

Itemcodes to include SPEC name.
ITEMCODE LENGTH SHORT

Itemcodes to exclude SPEC name.
ITEMCODE TOTAL
Itemcodes which are the same except for the specification
name and suffix are totalled.
ITEMCODE SEPARATE
Itemcodes which are the same except for the specification
name and suffix are listed separately.
ITEMCODE FROM :ABC

Itemcodes to be taken from the UDA named :ABC. The
UDA must exist for SPCOMs.
ITEMCODE FROM SPREF

Itemcodes to be taken from the SPCOM.
ITEMCODE FOR SUPPORTS FROM FSTATUS

Itemcodes for Supports to be taken from the FSTATUS
attribute of the Support.
ITEMCODE FOR SUPPORTS FROM :MDSItemCode

Itemcodes for Supports to be
:MDSItemCode UDA of the Support.
taken
from
the
ITEMCODE FOR SUPPORTS FROM PROP RNAM

Itemcodes for Supports to be taken from the RNAM
Property of the Support.
Related
Commands:
MATERIALLIST
DELIMITER
Command Syntax:
2:66
12.0

>-- ITEMcode --+----------------------.

|
|
-- FROM --+--SPREF* --+- LENGth --+-- LONG ----.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-- SHORT* --|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- TOTal* ----.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- SEParate --+---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
|
-- :udaname ------------------------+-->
|
--FOR SUPPORTS FROM --+-- SPREF* --------------+
|
|
-- :udaname ------------+
|
|
-- attribute -----------+
|
|
-- PROP property -------+-->
Querying:
2.3.48
Q ITEMCODE
Q ITEMCODE LENGTH
Q OPTions
JOINTNUMBERS
Function:
Numbering joints in Spool Drawings on an isometric.
Description:
By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers for

every joint in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be output on
an isometric by switching JOINTNumbers ON.
Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics from
the DESIGN database.
The joints are sequentially numbered from one end of the Spool
Drawing, with each number being given a prefix indicating the
type of joint. The default prefixes are:
Flange
Screwed
Compression
Note: The F, S & C codes are ATexts, and can be changed.

The numbers are displayed in a diamond, with an arrow pointing
to the joint. If the total number of characters (prefix + number) is
greater than 3, the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g.
<FL124>.
Examples:
JOINTN ON
Switches joint numbering on
JOINTN OFF
Switches joint numbering off.
2:67
12.0

2.3.49
Related
Commands:
PBENDNUMBERS
WELDNUMBERS
Syntax Graph:
>--- JOINTNumbers ---+--- ON ----.

|
|
--- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q JOINTNumbers
KEYS
Function:
Allows components with specified SKEYS to be treated like

instruments.
Description:
Component types that can be tagged, that is types that can have
their names plotted automatically on the isometric drawing, can
be treated like instruments. This means that:
If INSTRUMENT SPREF is set, the SPREF will be used as

the itemcode.
If INSTRUMENT NAME is set, the itemcode column will be

left blank and the name will be appended to the description.
If INSTRUMENT NAME WITH BALLOONS is set, the

name will be output in a balloon on the isometric.
The types that can be tagged are:
INST
TRAP
VALV
VENT
FILTER PCOM
TWA VFWA
To treat a component type as an instrument, give each specific

component type a key number, and then relate the key number
to the symbol key (SKEY) by the KEYS command.
See the TAG command for more information about tagging.
Examples:
KEYS 1 VVFL
Any valve with the symbol key VVFL, and which has a
name, will have its name appended to its description and
the itemcode column left blank. If a valve with the symbol
key VVFL is not named, its SPREF will be output as its
itemcode in the normal way.
KEYS 1
Remove the component from the key number list by
quoting its number only.
Command Syntax:
>--- KEYS --- keynumber --+--- skey ---.

|
|
--------------+--->
where keynumber is the key number (which must be in the

range 1 to 20) and skey is the symbol key (SKEY attribute).
Querying:
Q OPTIONS
2:68
12.0

2.3.50
Q KEYS
List the key numbers currently set.
Q KEYS
keynumber
List the SKEY associated with the number.
LEGLENGTH
Function:
Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows, tees and
crosses.
Description:
By default, the plotted leg length of Elbows, Tees and Crosses is

9mm. If necessary you can change this value. The minimum leg
length allowed is 6mm. If you specify a smaller value than this,
ISODRAFT will give the message
Leglength set to minimum value of 6mm
2.3.51
Examples:
LEGLength 12
Command Syntax:
>--- LEGLength --- <uval> --->
Querying:
Q LEGLENGTH
Q OPTIONS
LINETHICKNESS
Function:
Allows you to control (optionally) the thickness of line used to

represent piping.
Description:
This command allows you to specify a line thickness (from 1 to

10) to represent piping on the isometric. A default value (3) is
used if you do not specify a thickness.
Examples:
LINETHICKNESS 8
Specifies a line thickness of 8 to be used to represent piping.
Command Syntax:
>--- LINEthickness --- <uval> --->
Querying:
Q LINEthickness
Q OPTions
2:69
12.0

2.3.52
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE
Function:
Allows you to specify an additional length of tube on cut tube to

compensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges, where the
ALLO attribute has not been set.
Description:
If a cut pipe list has been specified using the CUTPIPELIST

command, ISODRAFT automatically includes a site fitting
allowance in each calculated cut pipe length which terminates
in:
A flange with its LOOSE attribute set to TRUE (i.e. a loose

flange)
An element of generic type WELD which has the symbol

key WF (i.e. a field-fit weld)
The allowance is taken from the value of the ALLO attribute for
the weld or flange, if set. If the value of ALLO is not set (or zero),
the allowance defaults to 150mm. The default allowance can be
altered using the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command.
The fabricator and/or erector can be informed of the in-built
allowance by means of a message in the title block area.
Note: The dimension shown on the isometric drawing is the
actual designed dimension.
Examples:
LOOSE 4 INCH
Adds 4 inches to tube length for each field-fitted weld or
loose flange with no ALLO value set.
LOOSE 0
No additional tube length added for field-fitted welds or
loose flange.
2.3.53
Command Syntax:
>--- LOOSeflangeallowance --- <uval> --->
Querying:
Q LOOSeflangeallowance
Q OPTions
MARGIN
Function:
Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the drawing.
Description:
By default, a 5mm wide blank margin is provided on each side of

the drawing area. The MARGIN command allows you to specify
the widths of the left, right, top and bottom margins
independently.
2:70
12.0

Examples:
MARGIN TOP 0.5 IN

Sets top margin to 0.5 inch.
MARGIN L15 R15 T25 B25

Sets all four margins in a single command line (assumes
current units are mm).
2.3.54
Command Syntax:
.---------<--------.
/
|
>--- MARGin ---*--- Left value -----|
|
|
|--- Right value ----|
|
|
|--- Top value ------|
|
|
--- Bottom value ---+--->
Related
Commands:
RESERVE
Querying:
Q MARGin
Q OPTions
MARK
Function:
Defines if the Pipe revision attribute (REV) should be

incremented and if the Branch detail attribute (DETA) should be
set to TRUE after successful detailing by ISODRAFT.
Description:
By default, the REV and DETA attributes will not be changed

when a pipe or branch has been detailed.
If MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute for each

Branch detailed will be set to TRUE.
If MARK REVISION ON is specified, the REV attribute of

each Pipe detailed will incremented.
By default, ISODRAFT will not detail a pipe if any of its branches

has its DETA attribute set to TRUE. To override this, use the
command MARK IGNORE ON.
The MARK command generates an inter-DB macro, to be run in
DESIGN to set the REV and DETA attributes as described. This
macro will be created (in the project's XXXMAC directory) only
when you carry out a module change or execute a SAVEWORK
command.
2:71
12.0

Examples:
MARK DETail ON
Sets the DETA attribute of each Branch to TRUE.
MARK REVision ON
Increments the REV attribute of the Pipe.
The defaults for the detail and revision flag options are:
MARK DETAIL OFF

MARK REVISION OFF
MARK IGNORE OFF
2.3.55
Command Syntax:
>--- MARK ---+--- DETail -----.

|
|
|--- REVision ---|
|
|
--- IGNOre -----+--- ON ----.
|
|
--- OFF* --+--->
Querying:
Q MARK
Q OPTions
MATCONTROL
Function:
Creates a material control file.
Description:
The material control file is an ASCII interface file which can be

used to pass details of material requirements to an external
material control program. This file contains fixed-format records
of all materials incorporated into the isometric drawing, including
piping components, tube, bolts, etc.
A material control file is produced for each ISODRAFT DETAIL
command. The file generated during a multiple plot run contains
material records for all pipelines detailed by that command. The
records thus derived are added to any records already in the file.
This filing command always operates in append mode: that is,
new data is always added to the end of any existing file of the
same name rather than overwriting the current contents. If the
specified file does not already exist, a new file of that name is
created.
To avoid accumulating large files (due to the use of append
mode), always delete redundant files once the required data has
been transferred to the external material control system.
The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record
of the quantity if each type of component for each pipeline or
split drawing. Each record sequence begins with a general
header, which includes references and specification applicable
to the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown of
the individual items.
2:72
12.0

You can add extra information to the basic material control file
using the EXTENDED command. This adds the following to the
file:
Part numbers (in word 8 of component records)
Item descriptions (as record -21)
File header with: -5 record (originating program/version) -3

record (title block information)
Material Control File defines the codes used to identify the

records.
2.3.56
Command Syntax:
>--- MATControl ---+--- name ---+---EXTended--.

|
|
|
|
-------------|
|--- OFF ------------------|
|
|
--------------------------+--->
Querying:
Q MATControl
Q OPTIONS
MATERIALLIST
Function:
Allows you to control whether the material list is shown on the

isometric, and alter the display format if required.
Description:
The MATERIALLIST command allows you to control:
Whether or not the list is shown on the drawing at all. The

default is for the list to be plotted.
The position of the list on the drawing sheet. The default is

left-hand side.
Whether the characters used for plotting the list are small,
medium or large. The default is medium.
The spacing between the lines in the list, relative to the

default of 100.
The order that columns of details are shown on the list, and
whether columns are displayed at all.
The width of the itemcode column in characters. Default is

8 characters and the maximum length is 29 characters.
Both lengths exclude the leading / in the PDMS name.
Whether or not component descriptions are included in the

list. By default all descriptions are included.
Whether part numbers created in the SPOOLER module

are used, or whether part numbers are generated
automatically in ISODRAFT and held in the DESIGN
database
(using
the
PARTNUMBERS
FROMDB
command), or part numbers generated by ISODRAFT
(using the PARTNUMBERS GENERATED command).
2:73
12.0

If you are using totalled database part numbers, multiple

part numbers will be output, separated by spaces, in a
single entry in the material list, wrapping round if the
column width is exceeded. You should ensure that the part
numbers column is wide enough to display several part
numbers (say, eight characters) or the material list will be
just as long. The quantity column will show the total of like
items. Part number tags will still be individual.
How the overflow of long lists is to be handled, and if extra

sheets are needed, how they are to be numbered.
Formatting the Material List

If you leave ISODRAFT to its default settings (as described
below), the material list will always be produced on the left hand
side of the drawing sheet, using medium size characters to a
standard linespacing. The itemcode column will be eight
characters wide, and material descriptions will be included in the
list. A separate material list will be plotted for every drawing
sheet listing only the items on that sheet, with any continuations
being plotted on a blank, dummy sheet.
These default settings will probably be appropriate for many
uses of ISODRAFT. However, if need be you can change these
settings to your own requirements. Examples of how to do this
are included below.
Long Material Lists, and Sheet Numbering
If a material list is too long to fit onto one sheet it will normally be
continued on a dummy sheet. This sheet will be identified DRG
n OF m and will contain only the overflow of the material list.
Alternatively, you can specify that the material list will be
continued in a second area beside the first one. This will result in
a non-standard size for the drawing sheet, which will exceed the
normal width by the amount needed for the second material list.
Inclusion of Database Part Numbers
The SPOOLER module allows you to set part numbers on:
piping components; sections of tubes; bolts and additional
items. If this feature is used it applies to an individual pipe,
individual branch or to a drawing as defined in the SPOOLER
module.
The PARTNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to include
part numbers from the DESIGN database in the material list. If
ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered parts it will display an error
message and halt the drawing of the isometric. You can specify
SEParate part numbers, which will generate an entry for each
item; TOTalled part numbers, which will create a single entry for
each item with a quantity or PIPEonlyseparate, which will list all
pipes separately but will generate a totalled list of other
components.
2:74
12.0

If this part numbering feature of DESIGN has not been used,

ISODRAFT will produce part numbers according to its own
system defaults.
If you are using the PARTNUMBERS FROMDB option you can
define your own material list format. You can specify which items
appear on the list, and in what order they appear. The
TABLEDEFINITION command allows you to control the content,
nature and order of standard column details in the material list.
You can also define additional columns (using the commands
TABLEDEFINITION COLUMNNUMBER text attribute). In this
fashion you can define the additional column title, which
SPCOM or component attribute or UDA will be used as data to
fill the column, the column width and the order it will be shown
on the list. A remarks column may be included for the cutting list
remarks, since each piece of tube is listed separately.
The PARTNUMBERS PERSPOOL command displays part
numbers separately for each spool.
Note: If the attribute of a chosen SPCOM is a reference UDA,
referring to a text element, then the value of STEXT for
that text appears in the column.
Examples:
Material list formatting
MATE OFF
Material list not shown on drawing.
MATE RIGHT CHARH 2.0

Material list plotted on right-hand side of drawing sheet,
using 2.0mm high characters.
MATE LEFT CHARH 2.5

Material list plotted on left-hand side of drawing sheet,
using 2.5mm high characters.
MATE LSPA 105

Increases the line spacing by 5%
MATE CODE 12
Itemcode column 12 characters wide.
MATE NODESC
Material descriptions omitted from list.
MATE DESC
Material descriptions included in list.
MATE TABLED COL 1 QUANT

Defines column 1 in the material list as Quantity.
MATE TABLED COL 2 EMP

Sets column 2 as an empty column.
2:75
12.0

MATEriallist DRWG
Plots a separate material list on every drawing sheet,
listing only items drawn on that sheet.
MATEriallist LINE
Plots, on the first drawing sheet, a single material list for
the whole pipe line or system.
Long material lists
MATE DUMMY
Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, with no
isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered. Multiple
sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc. This is the default.
MATE DUMM SING

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which has
no isometric plot on it. Single sheets numbered 1 of 1.
Multiple sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc.
MATE DUMM SUFF

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which has
no isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered.
Multiple sheets numbered 1 of n, 1A of n (for the sheet
with the material list only), 2 of n etc
MATE OVER
Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on the
same drawing sheet. Single sheets are not numbered.
Note: This may produce non-standard drawing sizes.
MATE OVER SINGle

Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on the
same drawing sheet. Sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc.
Single sheets numbered 1 of 1.
The default is:
MATE ON LEFT CHARH 2.45 LSPAC 100 CODE 8

DESC DUMMY DRWG
Related
Commands:
ITEMCODE
MTEXTS
DTEXTS
RESERVE
Command Syntax:
2:76
12.0

/
>-MATEriallist-*|
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
||
|
|
|
||
-
.---------------------------------<-----------------------------------.
|
ON* -.
|
|
|
OFF -+---------------------------------------------------------------|
|
LEFT* -.
|
|
|
RIGHT -+-------------------------------------------------------------|
|
CHARHeight - value --------------------------------------------------|
|
LSPAcing - integer --------------------------------------------------|
|
CODE - integer ------------------------------------------------------|
|
DESCriptions* -------------------------------------------------------|
|
NODEscriptions ------------------------------------------------------|
|
TABLEdefinition -+---------------------------------------------------|
|
|
- COLumn val -+- PARTnumber --------------------. |
|
| |
|- DEScription -------------------| |
|
| |
|- BORe --------------------------| |
|
| |
|- ITEMcode ----------------------| |
|
| |
|- QUANtity -+- IN -+- <munits> --| |
|
|
| |
|
--------------------| |
|
| |
|- REMarks -+- AND -+- <remarks> -| |
|
|
| |
|
---------------------| |
|
| |
- <other> -----------------------+--|
PARTNumbers -+- PERSPool -.
|
|
|
|
------------+-- FROMDB ---+-- SEParate ----------.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- TOTalled ----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-- PIPEonlyseparate --+-----|
|
|
- GENerated -----------------------------|
DUMMy* --.
|
|
|
OVER ----+-----------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- SUFFix ---+--------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
--------------+--- SINGle ---------------------------------|
DRWG* --.
|
|
|
LINE ---+------------------------------------------------------------+-->
where <munits> is
METres or MILlimetres.
This lets you set the metric units to be used for pipe lengths in the Quantity column.
Note: That this affects metric isos only.
<remarks> is
2:77
12.0

.------------------------------------------------------------------------.
/
|
--*- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -.
.-----------.
|
|
|
/
|
|
-------------+- ON -+- component -*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- TUBE ------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- BOLT ------+- component -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- TUBE ------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- BOLT ------
|
|
|
|
- ALL -------+- nl -------------------|
|
|
-------------------------
This allows attributes or UDAs to be taken from the catalogue or from the component,
where component is one of the following:
BEND
ELBOw
CAP
CLOSure
COUPling
CROSs
FBLInd
FLANge
FTUBe
INSTrument
LJSEnd
OLET
TEE
PCOMPonent
REDUcer
SHU
TRAP
TUBE
UNIOn
VALVe
VFWAy
VTWAy
WELD
GASKet
SUPPort
ALL
<other> is -+- HEADing -.
|
|
|-----------+- text -.
|
|
- NOHeading --------+- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -|
|
|
|
|
-------------|
|
- WEIGHT -+- TOTAL FABRICATION -.
|
|
---------------------+--.
|
.-----------------------------<--------------------------------
|
--+- TOTAL ERECTION -.
|
|
------------------+- TOTAL COMBINED -.
|
|
------------------+- Factor --value --|
|
|
-------------------+--.
|
.-----------------------------<---------------------------------
|
--+- TubeFactor -- value --|
|
|
------------------------|
2:78
12.0

Column width can be specified as part of the TABLEDEFINITION COLUMN syntax by

adding:
- WITH WIdth value -+- nl -|
|
|
------
Querying:
2.3.57
Q MATEriallist
Q OPTions
MATLISTFILENAME
Function:
Specifies the name of a file to which the material list is to be

sent. Also specifies whether one file should be created for each
plot, or one file for all plots.
Description:
You can send a copy of the material list data to a text file. This
file can be printed, and edited to produce, for example, an
ordering schedule. The MATLISTFILENAME command
specifies the filename and the page length (as the number of
lines) for its formatted contents. The file contains Fortran
carriage control characters and page headers and footers.
Subsequent MATLISTFILENAME commands followed by the
same filename will overwrite the file, unless you use the
OVERWRITE option.
By default, the material list is not sent to a file, so you do not
have to specify a filename in order to use ISODRAFT. The
default page length is 55 lines.
Material list numbers are shown on the isometric plot even when
the material list is sent only to a file.
Examples:
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST
Material list data sent to named file with default page
length of 55 lines.
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST WITH 70 LINES

Material list data sent to named file with page length of 70
lines.
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST PERPLOT OVER WITH 70

LINES
Material list data sent to a number of files, one for each
plot, with page length of 70 lines. The filenames are taken
from the specified name, followed by an automatic
numeric suffix (in a similar fashion to plotfile naming). The
PERPLOTFILE OVERWRITE command overwrites any
files that exists with the same name as the generated files.
2:79
12.0

Command Syntax:
>-MATListfilename-+-filename +-OVERwrite --.
|
|
|
|
|-APPend -----|
|
|
|
|
|-PERPlotfile +- OVERwrite -.
|
|
|
|
|
'-------------+-------------|-With integer Lines-.
|
|
|
|
|
-------------+--------------------|
|
|
---OFF*----------------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
2.3.58
Q MATListfilename
Q OPTions
MESSAGEACCURACY
Function:
Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are positioned

on the isometric.
Description:
The MESSAGEACCURACY RADIAL option determines the

accuracy level of the radial search, based on the number of
radial directions searched away from the arrowhead, the
number of additional directions for kinked lines, and the length
of increments of leader lines. The levels are as follows:
Level
Radial directions
searched away from
arrowhead
Additional directions for

kinked lines
Length
increments of
leader line
18 directions @ 20 degrees
4mm
4 directions @ 40, 80
degrees
2mm
8 directions @ 20, 40, 80

degrees
1mm
Once
all
messages
have
been
positioned,
the
MESSAGEACCURACY ITERATIONS option repositions any
messages with crossing leader lines, and all messages with
leader lines passing through the text block. You can set a
maximum number of iterations, and the process is repeated until
one of the following conditions is satisfied:
No leader lines cross and no messages need to be moved.
The number of leader lines crossing and messages moving

is the same as the previous iteration.
The maximum number of iterations set by the option is

reached.
2:80
12.0

You should start with accuracy level 1. Higher accuracy levels

are achieved at the expense of performance. Increasing the
number of iterations is not as expensive as higher accuracy
levels, as often an equilibrium is reached before the maximum
number of iterations. Thus it is recommended that the effect of
increasing iterations be examined before increasing the
accuracy level.
Examples:
MESSAGEACC RADIAL 2
Sets the accuracy level to 2, as shown in the above table.
MESSAGEACC ITERATIONS 4
Sets the maximum number of iterations to 4.
MESSAGEACC DEFAULT
Sets the default conditions of level 1 accuracy and 1
iteration.
2.3.59
Command Syntax:
>--- MESSAGEACCuracy ---+--- RADial --- level -----.

|
|
|--- ITerations value -----|
|
|
--- DEFault --------------+--->
Querying:
Q MESSAGEACCuracy
MESSAGEFILENAME
Function:
Specifies the name of the file to which messages about how

detailing is progressing will be sent.
Description:
Before ISODRAFT will carry out a checking or detailing

operation, you must specify the name of a file to which error
and/or progress messages can be sent. There is no default file
name.
Examples:
MESS /ISOMESS
Creates a new message file.
MESS /ISOMESS OVER

Overwrites an existing file.
Command Syntax:
>--- MESSagefilename filename ---+--- OVER ---.

|
|
------------+--->
Querying:
Q MESSagefilename
Q OPTions
2:81
12.0

2.3.60
MTEXTS
Function:
Controls the material description part of item descriptions.
Description:
A complete item description in a material list consists of the

geometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXT
element) and the material description (derived from the
attributes of an MTEXT element).
MTEXT has three attributes: XTEXT, YTEXT and ZTEXT. By
default, the text which appears in the material list is the XTEXT
attribute, but this can be changed so that the text stored in the
YTEXT or ZTEXT attribute is displayed. This can be used, for
example, to store descriptions in different languages.
The MTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress the
material description to give a more concise material list entry.
Examples:
MTEXts Ytext
Sets the description to the text held in the YTEXT attribute
MTEXts Ztext
Sets the description to the text held in the ZTEXT attribute
MTEXts Xtext
Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute.
MTEXts IGNORE
Suppresses the material description completely.
MTEXts ON
Resets the material description to the text previously set.
(XTEXT by default.)
Related
Commands:
MATERIALLIST DTEXTS
Command Syntax:
>--- MTEXts ---+--|

|--|
|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q MTEXT
Q OPTIONS
2:82
IGNORE ---.
|
ON -------|
|
Xtext* ---|
|
Ytext ----|
|
Ztext ----+--->
12.0

2.3.61
OPTIONS
Function:
Allows you to reset all options to their default settings.
Description:
The OPTIONS command gives you a quick way of querying the

current settings of multiple options or of resetting all options to
their default states.
Note: After giving this command, you must specify the
destination (terminal or file) and the message file again.
2.3.62
Command Syntax:
>--- OPTions DEFault --->
Querying:
Q OPTions
Gives current settings of all options.
OUTCOM
Function:
Defines the style in which attributes are output on the isometric

drawing area. You can also output the P3 directions of FTUB
elements.
Description:
You can output piping component attributes and user-defined

attributes on the isometric drawing area. You can choose
whether the text is boxed or unboxed, and the style of box used.
You can also output empty boxes for manual mark-up. Six styles
are available:
Examples:
A rectangular box with straight ends
A rectangular box with angled ends
A rectangular box with round ends
A triangular box
A diamond-shaped box
Unboxed
OUTC NAME SHOP :UDA1 ON INST ELBO PCOM WITH

STR
Positions the attribute values for NAME, SHOP and the
UDA values for UDA1 as straight edged boxed comments
on all Instruments and Pcoms. The box leader line points
to the centre of the component.
OUTC SHOP OFF

Switches off the output of the SHOP attributes for all
components.
OUTC BLANK 6 ON BEND WITH ANGL

Outputs an empty angled-edge box on all bends with
space for 6 text characters.
2:83
12.0

OUTC NAME ON ELBO OFF

Switches off output of the NAME attribute on ELBOWS.
OUTC P3DIRF WITH STRAIGHT

Outputs P3 directions for FTUB as a straight edged box.
Restrictions:
Triangular boxes will have a limit of two characters.
Diamond boxes will have a limit of three characters.
Unset attributes will not be output.
Warnings are not output for unset or nonexistent attributes.
Empty boxes which are drawn as unboxed will not be

shown.
Command Syntax:
.-----<-----.
/
|
>- OUTCom -*- attribute -+
|
|
|- P3DIRFtub -+----------------.
|
|
|
|-------------+- ON component -+- WITH --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|---------+- BOXStyle style ---.
|
|
|
|
|
----------------+- OFF ------------------------|
|
|
- OFF -----------------------------------------------------+->
where attribute is one of the following:

NAME
OWNER
POSItion
ORIentation
SPREf
LSTUbe
BUILt
SHOP
ISPEc
TSPEc
ANGLe
HEIGht
RADIus
LOOSe
LOFFl
ALLOwance
CREF
CRFA
CSTReLAXEs
ATTYp
SPLN
SPLT
LEND
BLANK n
:udaname
:udaname
NUMBER
integer
TYPE
where :udaname NUMBER integer outputs a single element of a UDA array.

component is one of the following:
BEND
ELBOw
CAP
CLOSure
CROSs
FBLInd
FLANge
FTUBEINSTru
ment
LJSEnd
OLET
TEE
PCOMPonent
REDUcer
SHU
TRAP
UNIOn
VALVe
VFWAy
VTWAy
WELD
GASKet
SUPPort
ALL
2:84
COUPling
12.0

style is one of the following:

STRaight
Querying:
ANGLed
ROUNd
TRIangular
DIAMond
Q OUTCom
Lists all attributes output.
Q OUTCom attribute
Lists information about the named attribute.
Q OUTCom BLANK
Lists all blank lengths output, e.g. 6, 8, 12.
Q OUTCom BLANK n
Lists information about the blank of given length.
Q OUTCom UDA
Lists the names of all UDAs output.
Q OUTCom :udaname
Lists information for the named UDA.
Q OUTCom :udaname NUMBer integer

Lists information about the given element of a UDA array.
Q OUTCom PTDIRF
Lists information about tagging P3 directions on FTUBs.
Q OPTIONS
Lists all options set.
Note: The following queries are for application work only, and
should not be used in normal program use. Triplets are a
combination of attribute, component and boxstyle:
Q OUTCom TRIPlets
Lists the number of triplets.
Q OUTCom TRIPlets n
Lists the details (component/attribute/ boxstyle) of triplet
number n.
Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets
Lists the number of blank triplets.
Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets n
Lists the details (component/number of characters/
boxstyle) of blank triplet number n
2:85
12.0

2.3.63
OVERALLSKEWS
Function:
Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are shown

as overall skewboxes across branches, or as separate
skewboxes between branch connections.
Examples:
OVERALLSKEWS ON
Triangle skewboxes shown as overall skewboxes across
branches
OVERALLSKEWS OFF
Triangle skewboxes shown as separate skewboxes
between branch connections.
2.3.64
Related
Commands:
SKEWBOX
Command Syntax:
>--- OVERALLSKews ---+--- ON* ---.

|
|
--- OFF ---+-->
Querying:
Q OVERALLSK
Q OPTIONS
PBENDNUMBERS
Function:
Numbering the pulled bends in Spool Drawings on an isometric.
Description:
By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers for

every pulled bend in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be
output on an isometric, by switching PBENDNumbers ON.
Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics from
the DESIGN database.
The bends are sequentially numbered from one end of the Spool
Drawing with a default prefix of B. The numbers are displayed
in a diamond, with an arrow pointing to the pulled bend. If the
total number of characters (prefix + number) is greater than 3,
the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g. <B232>.
Examples:
Related
Commands:
PBENDN ON
Switches pulled bend numbering on.
PBENDN OFF
Switches pulled bend numbering off.
JOINTNUMBERS
2:86
WELDNUMBERS
12.0

2.3.65
Syntax Graph:
>--- PBENDNumbers ---+--- ON ----.

|
|
--- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q PBENDNumbers
Q OPTIONS
PICTURESCALE
Function:
Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing.
Description:
For a given sheet size, the scale of the isometric drawing is set
by default to give a good compromise between the amount of
information displayed and its legibility. The PICTURESCALE
command allows you to reset the scale. The value you give is
the scale factor relative to the default value of 100.
Note: Changing the picture scale does not scale the whole
isometric, but just affects the size of the symbols and
annotation relative to the length of pipe shown. The
material list is not affected.
It is probable that increasing the picture scale much above 100
will split the drawing onto more sheets. See the SPLIT
command for details of how this can be controlled.
Examples:
PICT 200
Magnifies the symbols to twice the size.
PICT 50
Reduces the size of the symbols by half.
Related
Commands:
SPLIT
Command Syntax:
>--- PICTurescale --- value --->
Querying:
Q PICTureSCale
Q OPTions
2:87
12.0

2.3.66
PLOTDETAILDATA
Function:
Allows you to position parameterised attribute data within detail plots.
Description:
Detail plots may also contain the parameterised values of any

allowable type of system or user defined attributes. The attributes are
defined using the PLOTDETaildata command. This definition
includes the following fields:
Which attributes to display.
X, Y coordinates of the parameterised text, relative to the origin

of the detail plot.
Character height.
Angle at which to display text.

The values of the different types of attributes are output as text
records, using the following formats:
Array attributes are shown separated by a line.
Examples:
Reference attributes are output as the full text of the attribute.
Logical attributes are shown as T or F.
Position, orientation and direction attributes are separated by

spaces.
PLOTDET /DETAIL1 ATTR PPOS 1 x 10 y 10 h 10 a

45
Plots the value of attribute PPOS 1 in DETAIL1, at a position
of 10:10 from the origin, with a character height of 10 and at an
angle of 45.
PLOTDET /DETAIL6 ATTR DPFN x 10 y 5 h 3.5 a 0

Plots the value of attribute DPFN in DETAIL6, at a position of
10:5 from the origin, with a character height of 3.5 and at an
angle of 0.
Command
Syntax:
>- PLOTDETaildata -- ATTRibute - ATQNUM --+|

||
||
-
Querying:
Q PLOTDETaildata All
X -----.
|
Y -----|
|
Height-|
|
Angle -+- value ->
Will output all information for all detailed PLOT files.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename All

Will list details of all parameters for the given PLOT file.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename NUM/ATTRIBUTES

Will display the number of attributes for the given PLOT file.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename ATTR INT

Will return the X,Y coordinates, height and angle of the INTth
parameter in the specified PLOT file.
2:88
12.0

2.3.67
PLOTTINGSCALE
Function:
Defines the scale of the plot independently of the drawing sheet

size.
Description:
By default, the actual size of the plotted drawing sheet

generated by ISODRAFT is the same as the designed sheet
size specified by the SIZE command. You can specify a plotted
sheet smaller than the designed sheet by using the
PLOTTINGSCALE command followed by a percentage scaling
factor in the range 50-100%.
Examples:
PLOT 70.71
Applied to an A2 drawing, will create an A3 plot (70.71 = 1/
2 expressed as a percentage). This can be useful if, for
example, you want the drawing layout provided for an A2
plot, but you want output from an A3 plotter.
PLOT 50
Applied to an A1 drawing, will create an A3 plot.
Command Syntax:
>--- PLOTtingscale value --->

where value represents a percentage scaling factor in the range
50-100%. The default is 100.
Querying:
2.3.68
Q PLOTT
Q OPTIONS
POSITION
Function:
Allows you to create tables of standard text annotations or pipe

attributes.
Description:
All items of text used for the standard annotation of isometrics

have default positions at which they are plotted on the drawings.
Some of these texts, together with a list of specified pipe
attributes, can be plotted in a separate area away from the main
drawing.
The standard text annotations which can be repositioned are as
follows:
2:89
12.0

The North direction arrow;
Spool numbers;
Sheet numbers; i.e. X in DRG X OF Y;
Sheet totals; i.e. Y in DRG X OF Y;
The Project Number;
System isometric names;
The Bend radius;
The date.
You can also specify the positions of up to 100 additional pipe

attributes such as the pipes name, owner, temperature and
pressure rating, and include UDAs and user-specified text. You
can also specify the position of drawing attributes when detailing
a drawing as defined by the SPOOLER module, using the
System attribute option.
All text must be positioned in a margin, away from the drawing
area, to avoid overwriting the isometric plot itself. You will
normally allocate a suitable margin by using the MARGIN or
RESERVE commands.
Note: No checks on text positions are made by ISODRAFT, so
you must take care not to corrupt the isometric by poor
positioning.
Note: Positioning an annotation at the origin (0, 0) has the
effect of suppressing the output of that text. This is
particularly useful for suppressing the output of names or
the North arrow.
It is possible to output the same piece of text at more than one
position on an isometric plot by defining its coordinates more
than once. The new definitions will not overwrite the earlier
ones. The command POSITION text OFF is used to cancel a
defined text position. You can define an angle of rotation for the
positioned text, ranging from horizontal to vertical, using the
ANGLE command.
The POSITION command also allows you to produce a number
of different tables on the isometric:
BENDING TABLES can be produced using the BENDTABLE
command. This creates a sketch showing a schematic of a
bend, annotated to show the various bend parameters, and a
table giving the appropriate lengths, radii and angles for pulled
bends appearing on that drawing. If needed, you can output the
data as an ASCII file for transfer to a bending machine.
2:90
12.0

Drawing History Tables can be included using the

REVISIONTABLE command. This produces a detailed history of
the drawing (for example dates, descriptions, who drew and
approved the drawing and so on). Details for up to ten revisions
of the isometric will be included (numbered 0 to 9). Only UDAs
can be selected for the table, and each UDA represents a family
(for example, :REV0 means subsequent table entries will be
taken from :REV0, :REV1, :REV2 and so on until an unset
attribute is found.
Design Conditions Tables are available through the
SYSTEMTABLE command. These apply to system isometrics or
drawings as defined by the SPOOLER module. For each column
a pipe attribute or UDA can be selected (see the tabledef syntax
description). If a SHORTCODE is defined it will be used to label
the divisions between pipes on a drawing (a shortcode of L will
label pipes as L1, L2 etc.). This shortcode can be included in the
table against the pipe name. Also, you can specify delimiter
characters for pipe name prefix and suffix. If you select either or
both delimiters for a name, the prefix or suffix will be stripped off
before outputting the pipe name to the table. Therefore, two
pipes forming one line on the P&ID, bearing the same basic
name but with different area code suffixes, will appear as a
single name in the table.
Weld Tables can be included by using the WELDTABLE
command, and this also allows you to create a Weld Report File.
Note that WELDNUMBERS FROMDB must be selected if you
wish to produce either a user-defined Weld Table or a Weld
Report File (see the WELDNUMBERS command). Each column
must be set to be filled by an attribute or UDA of the welds. You
can choose one column as an alphanumeric sort key (the default
being the weld number). If you choose a column other than weld
number as a sort key, the table will be sorted firstly by your
selected column and secondly by weld number. The sort order
can be forwards (meaning numbers start at the top of the table)
or reverse (numbers start at the bottom of the table). Column
title can be left blank if needed, and you can leave column
contents empty if desired.
Dynamic Detail Area PLOT Files can be included using the
DETAILPLOTS command. These can show details of any
particular item of interest on the isometric (welded supports,
drain and vent assemblies, complex manifolds etc.).
2:91
12.0

Command Syntax:
>-POSItion ----.
|
>-TEXTPOSition-+-SYSTEMName-------.
|
|
|-SPOOlnumber------|
|
|
|-PROJnumber-------|
|
|
|-DATE-------------|
|
|
|-NORTHArrow-------|
|
|
|-SHEETNumber------|
|
|
|-SHEETTotal-------|
|
|
|-BENDRADius-------|
|
|
|-SYSTem attribute-|
|
|
|-attribute--------|
|
|
|-text ------------+-AT-+-X <uval> Y <uval>-.
|
|
|
|
|
|
-Y <uval> X <uval>-+-CHARH val -+-ANGle val-.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-----------+-BOXed--.
|
|
|
|
|
|
+-<xyoff>-<tab>------+-.
|
|
----------------------|
|
|- <reltxt> -------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
- OFF ------------------------------------------------------|
|-BENDtable-------------------+- <possiz> --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- FILEonly ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|-REVISIONTable---.
- OFF --------+----------------------------------|
|
|
|
|-SYSTEMTable-----+- <possiz> -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- OFF ------+-----------------.
|
|
|
|
|
- ADD -- <tabledef> ----------+------------------------------|
|
|
|-WELDtable----+--<sortby>--.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|------------+--<possiz>--.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
--FILEonly--|
|
|
|
|
|
|
----ADD---<tabledef>-----+--------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|-DETAILPlots -+-CORner-<possiz>-<direc>-+-STACK-<int>-<direc>-.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
---------------------+- SCALE-<int> --|
|
|
|
|
|-MAnual- CHARH val --SCALE-<int> -------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|-ON ------------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
OFF -----------------------------------------------------------|
|-TEXTs------------.
|
|
|
|
|-ATTRibutes-------|
|
|
|
|
|-SYSTEMATTRibutes-+---OFF------------------------------------------------------|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+->
2:92
12.0

xyoff defines the x and y offsets between the columns and

rows for positioning attributes on system isometrics, as
follows:
>--+-- XOFFset - <uval> --+-- YOFFset - <uval> --.
|
----------------------|
|
|
-- YOFFset - <uval> --+-- XOFFset - <uval> --|
----------------------+-->
uval is a dimension in either the current or specified units. For

example:
X 10 Y 30
current units
X 0.5 inches Y
1.2 inches
specified units
reltxt positions the specified corner of the new text relative to

the specified corner of the previous text by the X and Y offset
distances. The syntax for this is:
- BL -|
|
- BR -|
|
- TL -|
|
- TR -+- RELto -+|
||
||
-
Where:
BL
BR
TL
TR
=
=
=
=
bottom left
bottom right
top left
top right
BL -.
|
BR -|
|
TL -|
|
TR -+- XOFF -value-|- YOFF -value-|- CHARH -value-+- BOX -.
|
|
|
|
+-------|
-----------------------------------------------------+->
For example, the command:

BR REL TL XOFF 10 YOFF 20 CHARH 2.5 BOX
will position the bottom-right corner of the new text 10mm
across and 20mm up from the top-left corner of the previous
text. The new text will be boxed and have a character height of
2.5mm.
tab defines the number of rows and columns in the table and
the order in which they are filled:
>- DIREction -+- Horizontal -.

|
|
- Vertical ---+- Rows value - Columns value ->
tabledef defines the headings and contents for the production

of user defined tables. Note that ISODRAFT automatically
tabulates the contents of the tables and draws lines between
the rows and columns. The syntax is:
2:93
12.0

.----------------------------------------------------------------------------.
>-+- COLumn number -+- HEADing--.
|
|
|
|
|
|-----------------+-----------+--text--.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- NOHeading---------+--FILL--.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--------+--attribute--.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
--SHORTcode--|
|
|
|
|
|
|
--EMPty-----------------WIdth value--|
where number is the number of the column you wish to

define, text is the column heading (in inverted commas),
attribute is any attribute name and value is the column width
in characters. Note that SHORTCODE applies to the System
Table only.
possiz allows you to position your table:
>- CORner -+||-
BL
BR
TL
TR
-.
-|
-|
-+- AT -.
|
|
------+- X <uval> Y <uval> -.
|
|
- Y <uval> X <uval> -+- CHARacterHeight value ->
with BL being Bottom Left, TR being Top Right, and so on.

This allows you to position one of the corners of the table
exactly.
direcn gives a direction for future detail plots:
>-- DIRection --+- Up ----.
|
|
|- Down --|
|
|
|- Left --|
|
|
-Right --+-->
CHARHeight value is the character height in mm. The default

size is 2.1mm, while the minimum size is 1.4mm.
sortby is:
>-- SORTby -- attribute --+-- FORwards --.
|
|
-- REVerse ---+-->
Note: For detailing at Branch level, attributes NAME, PSPEC,

ISPEC, TSPEC and PTSP are taken from the Branch
settings. Other attributes are taken from the Pipe
settings. If you position any pipe attribute which has an
associated ATEXT, the output of the Atext will be
suppressed.
2:94
12.0

Example:
Defining a Spool Number Table

A 4x3 table of spool numbers can be set up by using the
command
POSI SPOOLN AT X 100 Y 10 CHARH 3 XOFF -10

YOFF 8 DIRE V R 4 C 3
These table parameters (i.e. X Offset -10mm; Y Offset 8mm;
Character height 3mm; Direction Vertical; Number of rows 4;
Number of columns 3) will generate the following output for a
pipe containing 11 spools:
[8]
[4]
[11]
[7]
[3]
[10]
[6]
[2]
[9]
[5]
[1]
8mm
-10mm
Direction
of table
y
x
The origin of the table (which was positioned at X 100mm, Y

10mm by the POSI SPOOLN command) is at the bottom lefthand corner of the first spool number.
If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS OFF before plotting the
isometric, the space allocated for the table will appear as a
blank area. If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS PREFIX, the
prefix will be plotted with the spool number.
If the number of spools exceeds the number of places
available in the table (12 in this example), the table will be
filled and then an error message will be generated.
Example:
Creating a Drawing History Table

If you wished to plot a table that showed the history of an
isometric and who was involved in its production, you could
enter the following commands:
POSI REVISIONT COR BL AT X 20 Y 40 CHARH

2.0 COL 1 HEAD Rev :REV0 WI 3
COL 2 HEAD Description :DES0 WI 8
COL 3 HEAD Date :DAT0 WI 8
C0L 4 HEAD Drwn By :DRW0 WI 7
COL 5 HEAD Chkd By :CHK0 WI 11
COL 6 HEAD Appd By :APA0 WI 11
COL 7 HEAD Appd By :APB0 WI 9
EXIT
Example:
A System Isometric
The following commands will position the pipe attributes
NAME, BORE, TEMP, PRESS and CCEN as shown in
Examples of Isometric Plots.
2:95
12.0

MATE OFF
(Material List not plotted)
MARG R 120
(Set width of right margin)
DIME
ON
(Plot composite-style dimensions)
COMP
SPLIT 1 DRW
(Plot whole system on a single sheet)
POSI NAME AT X480 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V

ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI BORE AT X510 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V
ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI TEMP AT X525 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V
ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI PRESS AT X540 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V
ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI CCEN AT X555 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V
ROWS 6 COLU 1
DETAIL /SYSTEM1 /SYSTEM2 /SYSTEM3 /SYSTEM4 AS /
ISOG96.TEST
Querying:
Q OPTions
Q
TEXTPOSitions
Lists all current user-defined text positions.
Q
TEXTPOSitions
text
Lists the position of the attribute given by

text.
The following Query commands list the parameters set for the
item, as described in the previous pages:
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
SYSTEMName
SPOOlnumbers
PROJnumber
DATE
NORTHArrow
SHEETNumber
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions
BENDRADius
UDA
BENDtable
REVISIONTable
SYSTEMTable
WELDTable
SYSTem
TABlewidths
2:96
12.0

Note: The following queries are for application use only:
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT
Tells you the number of user text strings (i.e. ABC
strings) positioned.
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT n
Gives the actual string value for the item at position n in
the list.
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT text

Gives the details (X, Y coordinates, character heights
etc.) for text.
Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute
Number of pipe attributes/UDAs positioned.
Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute n
Gives actual attribute of item in position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSition <att>
Gives details of the named attribute.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute
Gives the number of drawing attributes/UDAs.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute n
Gives the attribute at position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute <att>

Gives the details of the named attribute.
2.3.69
POSTPROCESS
Function:

executed during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer file
processing.
Description:
The PREPROCESS command defines system commands which

will be executed after the intermediate transfer file has been
written and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up to
five such commands, each identified by an integer.
Examples:
PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command
Command Syntax:
.----------------.
/
|
>--- PREPROcess -+- integer - text --+-->
Related
Commands:
POSTPROCESS
PROCESS
2:97
12.0

2.3.70
PRECISION
Function:
Description:
Examples:
PRECISION BORES NOMINAL

Sets bore dimensions to be nominal
PRECISION BORES ACTUAL

Sets bore dimensions to be actual
2.3.71
Command Syntax:
>--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---.

|
|
--- ACTUAL ----+--->
Querying:
Q PRECIsion BORES
PREPROCESS
Function:

executed during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer file
processing
Description:
The PREPROCESS command defines system commands which

will be executed after the intermediate transfer file has been
written and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up to five
such commands, each identified by an integer.
Examples:
PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command'
Command Syntax:
>--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---.

|
|
--- ACTUAL ----+--->
Querying:
2.3.72
PROCESS
Function:
Instructs ISODRAFT to process a transfer file.
Description:
The PROCESS command is used to process a transfer file. The

operation takes account of any preprocessing or postprocessing
actions which have been defined.
Examples:
PROCESS TRANS /TRANSFER

Processes a transfer file named /TRANSFER.
2:98
12.0

2.3.73
Command Syntax:
>--- PROCess TRANsferfilename filename --->
Related
Commands:
PREPROCESS
POSTPROCESS
PROJECTNUMBER
Function:
Writes the project number in the title block area.
Description:
The PROJECTNUMBER command writes the project number

into the title block area. A project number of up to 12
alphanumeric characters can be used. The default is for no
project number to be shown on the drawings.
If PROJECTNUMBER FROMSYSTEM is specified, the project
number shown on entry to the project, and stored within the
System DB, will be plotted automatically. This text will have
been set by the System Administrator using ADMIN.
Examples:
PROJECTN FRO
The project number will be taken from the system project
number.
PROJECTN AA-1234-ZZ
The project number will be AA-1234-ZZ.
Command Syntax:
Querying:
2.3.74
>--- PROJECTNumber ---+--- text ---------.

|
|
--- FROmsystem ---+--->
Q PROJECTNumber
Q OPTIONS
Query
Function:
Allows you to find the current settings of various options.
Command Syntax:
>--- Query --- option --->

The main ISODRAFT options are:
ATTAName
ATExt
ATExt value
AXES
BENDRADius
BOLTing
CHARHeight
CLLEngthfilena
me
CONTinuationsym
bols
2:99
12.0

CONTNotes
CONTWelds
COOrdinates
COORDS
CUTMarks
CUTPipelistfile
CUTTinglist
DATE
DELImiter
DETAILList
DIMDist
DIMEnsions
DTEXts
ELEVations
EQUIPMENTNumberi
ng
FALLinglines
FLOWarrows
FRAMe
INSTName
INSULationcontr
ol
ISO
ISOType
ITEMcode
ITEMcode LENGTH
KEYS
LEGLength
KEYS
keynumber
LOOSeflangeallow
ance
MARGin
MARK
MATControl
MATEriallist
MATListfilename
MESSagefilename
MTEXts
OPTions
OUTCom
OUTCom
attribute
OUTCom
value
OUTPut UNITS
OVERALLSKew
s
PICTurescale
PLOTTingscale
PROJECTNumb
er
REFDIMensions
REPEatbility
REServe
RETUrnfilename
SIZE
SKEWbox
SPECBreak
SPLIt
SPOOlnumbers
BLANK
STACkingarrange
ment
SUPPORTFilenam
e
SUPPorts
SYMBolfilename
TAGging
TAPping
TEXTPOSitions
TEXPOSitions text
TITleblock
TITleblock value
TOLerance
TRACingcontrol
TRANsferfilename
TRUNcate
TUBESplits
UNDerlayplotname
UNITS
WASTage
WASTage integer
WELDId
WELDNumbers
WELDType
2:100
12.0

2.3.75
RECREATE
Function:
Creates a macro file or binary file which can then be run into
ISODRAFT again.
Description:
On UNIX workstations, the RECREATE command can be used

to create a macro file which can then be read into ISODRAFT
again to recreate the existing option settings or the detail list.
See the Software Customisation Guide for more information
about writing and using macros. You can also use the
RECREATE command to save the screen layout, which can
then be read in again using the INSTALL SETUP command.
RECREATE has other options available in different PDMS
modules. See the relevant Reference Manuals for details.
Examples:
RECReate OPTions /OPT OVER

Saves the current option settings in a file named /OPT.
Any existing file named /OPT will be overwritten.
RECReate DETAillist /LIST

Saves the detail list in a file named /LIST
RECReate /DISP
Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.
Related
Commands:
INSTALLSETUP
Command Syntax:
>-- RECReate --+----------------.
|
|
|-- OPTions -----|
|
|
-- DETAillist --+-- filename --+-- OVERwrite --.
|
|
---------------+-->
2.3.76
REFDIMENSIONS
Function:
Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off.
Description:
If reference dimensions have been set up in the DESIGN

database, they can be shown on isometric plots by using the
REFDIMENSIONS command.
2:101
12.0

Examples:
REFDimensions ON
Displays reference dimensions.
REFDimensions OFF
Reference dimensions are not displayed.
2.3.77
Command Syntax:
>--- REFDimensions ---+--- ON ----.

|
|
--- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q REFDIMensions
Q OPTIONS
REMOVE
Function:
Removes named elements from the list of items to be processed

by the next DETAIL or CHECK command.
Description:
The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can be

defined before giving the CHECK or DETAIL command by
setting up a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the
ADD command and remove them using the REMOVE
command. The next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command acts
on elements in the current Detail List (that is, all elements in the
Add List except those in the Remove List).
Examples:
REMOVE /PIPE3-1 /BRAN3-2-2

Removes the named elements from the Detail List.
REMOVE EMPTY
Empties the Remove List.
Related
Commands:
ADD
CHECK
DETAIL REPEATABILITY
Command Syntax:
.----<------------------------------------------------.
/
|
>-- REMove ---+--- <gid> ---------------------------------------------|
|
|
|-- SHEETNumber --+--- integer --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
--- SINGle ---+---------.
|
|
|
|
|-- SPOOL --+-- integer --+-- OF integer --|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
----------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-- text ----------------------+-- <gid> ---|
|
|
----EMPTY----------------------------------------------+--->
Note: The DETAIL EMPTY also empties the Remove List. See
the DETAIL command.
2:102
12.0

Restrictions:
Querying:
2.3.78

Remove List is 100.
The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets

or spools) is 20. You can only add sheets for a Pipe which
has previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so that
split points have been stored in the DESIGN database. See
the REPEATABILITY command.
Q DETaillist
Lists contents of both Add and Remove lists.
REPEATABILITY
Function:
Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split points for

subsequent storage in the DESIGN database.
Description:
When a pipe is detailed which needs splitting over more than

one sheet, ISODRAFT automatically generates split points.
Normally this data is not stored, and so if the design is altered
and the pipe detailed again, the split points may be in different
places.
Repeatability allows you to save these split points in a macro to
be run in DESIGN. This macro stores the split point information
in the DESIGN database. You can then use this information to
replot single sheets when you have made changes to your
design which only affect those sheets, keeping the split points in
the same positions as before.
A function in the SPOOLER module allows you to erase this split
point information if need be.
Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or equipment
trims.
Split ATTAs are automatically created at split points, in correct
list order, with correct coordinates. Once in place they are
indistinguishable from split ATTAs that have been manually
created. They can be repositioned as required. The macro will
select the ATTA using default selectors, and then set its
ATTYPE attribute to XXXX. (The macro will be handled in the
same manner as an inter-DB connection macro.)
Note: Prior to Version 10.4, the REPEATABILITY command
also stored spool identifiers in the database. This
function is now replaced by the SPOOLER module
functionality.
Examples:
REPE ON
REPE OFF
Related
Commands:
ADD DETAIL REMOVE SPLIT
2:103
12.0

Command Syntax:
Restrictions:
Querying:
2.3.79
>--- REPEatability ---+--- ON------.

|
|
--- OFF* ---+--->
Split ATTAs will not be automatically created if some

already exist in the pipe.
Re-ordering branches will destroy the integrity of the

repeatability data.
Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or

equipment trims.
Q REPEATABILITY
Q OPTIONS
RESERVE
Function:
Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of the drawing

area or the Material list.
Description:
You can reserve an area at the bottom of the drawing area or

Material list, which will be left blank when the isometric is
plotted. Note that if you want a blank area across the whole
sheet, not just the drawing area, you should use the MARGIN
command to specify a large bottom margin.
A reserved area can be used for standard notes, detail PLOT
files, a company name, etc. or it can be filled by information on a
backing sheet using the UNDERLAYPLOT command.
The default is a reserved height of zero; that is, no reserved
area.
Examples:
RESERVE 30
Reserves an area 30 units high across the drawing area.
RESERVE 2 INCH
Reserves an area 2 inches high across the drawing area.
RESERVE MAT 30
Reserves an area 30 units high across the bottom of the
Material list
Related
Commands:
MARGIN
Command Syntax:
>--- REServe -+-- <uval> --------------------.

|
|
-- MATeriallist --- <uval> ---+--->
Querying:
Q REServe
Q OPTions
2:104
12.0

2.3.80
SETCOMPDATE
Function:
Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.
Description:
Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB. You can set the
comparison date to an actual date, to a stamp, or, for a specific
DB, to an exact session number and/or extract number. The
comparison date can be used in queries and, for example, in
Change Highlighting, where it is necessary to specify a
comparison date in order to determine which elements have
been changed since the specified date.
Note: If a stamp is used to set the comparison date, this will set
the comparison session for each database within the
stamp. It will also reset any comparison dates set
previously.
Querying a date will only return a value if the last
SETCOMPDATE command used a date on its own, otherwise it
will return 'unset'. Similarly, querying a stamp is only valid if the
last SETCOMPDATE command used a stamp.
Examples:
SETCOMPDATE 10 January 2002

Sets the comparison date to 10 January 2002.
SETCOMPDATE STAMP stamp 016

Sets the comparison date to stamp 016.
Related
Commands:
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING
Command Syntax:
>- SETCOMPDATE -+- <date> -------------------------------------------------------------.
|- STAMP - name -------------------------------------------------------|
- FOR - DB - dbname - TO -+- <date> ----------------------------------|
|- Session - integer - EXTRACT -+- integer -|
|
'- dbname -|
|-- Session -- integer ---------------------|
-- EXTRACT -+- integer --------------------|
- dbname ---------------------+->
Querying:
Q COMPDATE EXTRACT FOR DB CTBATEST/DESI

Q COMPDATE COMPDATE SESSION FOR DB CTBATEST/
DESI
2:105
12.0

2.3.81
SIZE
Function:
Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing sheet.
Description:
The SIZE command allows you to specify the dimensions of the

drawing sheet; either in current or specified units, or as a
standard ISO or American drawing sheet size. The default is
ISO A2.
ISODRAFT will subtract the current margins and reserved area
(if any) before laying out the isometric plot, the material list,
frame and title block in the remaining area of the sheet.
Examples:
Related
Commands:
SIZE A3
Specifies ISO A3 size.
SIZE AA
Specifies American A size
SIZE H 300 W
400
Specifies dimensions 300mm high x 400mm

wide (assuming current units are mm).
MARGIN
RESERVE
Command Syntax:
>--- SIZE ---+--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
---
2.3.82
AA ---.
|
AB ---|
|
AC ---|
|
AD ---|
|
AE ---+---------------------------------.
|
A --- integer --------------------------|
|
Height --- value --- Width --- value ---|
|
Width --- value --- Height --- value ---+--->
Restrictions:
Standard ISO sizes, as defined by integer, must be in the range

A0 to A4.
Querying:
Q SIZE
Q OPTions
SKEWBOX
Function:
Controls how skewed piping is represented.
Description:
Any skewed sections of piping, whether or not they involve a fall,

can be represented either by full boxes (2D or 3D; see the
FALLSKEWS command) or by triangles.
2:106
12.0

Full box
Figure 2:6.
Triangle
Full and triangle skewboxes.
If triangle representation is specified, the following options are

available:
Standard dimensioning
Figure 2:7.
The dimensions can be shown in standard form or in a nonstandard form.
The triangle areas can be shown hatched (shaded),

partially hatched or unhatched.
Skew triangles can be tagged with swing angles in the

corners of the triangles. These are output in the first
corners of the triangles in the direction the line is detailed.
H and V notes can be output in the right angle corners of

horizontal (H) and vertical (V) triangles.
Overall skewboxes, or skewboxes between branches, can

be shown.
Non-standard dimensioning
Hatched
Standard and non-standard dimensioning styles, and hatching.
2:107
12.0

Standard dimensioning shows the horizontal and vertical

dimension lines of the triangle standing out from the sides of the
triangle. Non-standard dimensioning shows the dimension
characters positioned along the sides of the triangle itself. The
default is standard dimensioning.
The default standout distances for the two types of
dimensioning are:
13mm line standout for standard dimensioning
4mm character standout for non-standard dimensioning
By default, skewbox triangles are highlighted by parallel-line

hatching with a spacing of 3mm between the hatching lines. The
hatching can be switched off, the spacing altered or an area of
the triangles selected for hatching.
Note that these standout distances may not be set to the same
value as other standout distances.
Figure 2:8.
Overall and individual skewboxes.
2:108
12.0

Figure 2:9.
Examples:
Skewed and falling line with hatched triangle skewboxes.
SKEWBOX FULL
Skews shown by full boxes
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE
Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning,
13mm (default) standout for dimension lines, and hatching
at 3mm (default) spacing
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE NSTD HATCH OFF STANDOUT

7MM
Skews shown by triangles with non-standard dimensioning
(characters along triangle sides), a character standout of
7mm, and no hatching
25mm
2:109
12.0

SKEWBOX TRIANGLE STANDOUT 20MM HATCH PART

25
Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning, a
dimensioning line standout of 20mm, and partial hatching
at standard spacing for a length of 25mm (being the
maximum height that the shading will reach).
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE TAGS ANGLES

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning,
13mm (default) standout for dimension lines, and hatching
at 3mm (default) spacing, with swing angles shown in the
first corners
Related
Commands:
FALLINGLINES
DIMDISTANCE
FALLSKEWS
OVERALLSKEWS
Command Syntax:
>- SKEWbox -+-- FULL ----.
|
|
- TRIangle -+- NSTD --. .-----------------------------------------.
|
|/
|
---------*- HATCH -+- <uval> -+- PART/IAL -+- <uval>-|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- OFF ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|-- OFF --------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|-- DEFault ----------------------|
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------|
|
|
|-- STANdout --+-- <uval> ------------------|
|
|
|
|
|-- DEFault -----------------|
|
|
|
|
----------------------------|
|
|
|-- TAGS ------+-- ANGles --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- HV ------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- ON ------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-- OFF -----+---------------|
|
|
-------------------------------------------+>
Querying:
Q SKEWbox
Q OPTIONS
2:110
12.0

2.3.83
SPECBREAK
Function:
Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline specification is

noted, and which changes are recorded on the isometric.
Description:
Pipeline specification changes are indicated by notes against

the corresponding points on the isometric plot. By default,
specification changes are noted at component level, but they
can be noted at Branch level instead.
SPECBREAK BRANCH causes only changes in the Branch
specification to be recognised.
SPECBREAK COMPONENT causes the Branch specification to
be ignored and changes to be recognised only in the component
attributes LSTUBE or SPREF, or in the Branch attribute
HSTUBE .
The format in which a specification change is shown is that both
the original and new specifications are shown at each point of
change. The format is similar to that used for dimensioning.
SPECBREAK can be further modified to output specification
changes for material, insulation, tracing, paint, and (up to) five
user-defined specifications. By default, only specification
changes for Pipe will be output. By switching SPECCHANGES
to ON, you can output the other changes.
The following Atext defaults are associated with the specification
breaks on the drawing area:
Specification
Specification
ATEXT
Spec Break
ATEXT
Pipeline name
288 PIPE
288 PIPE
Material spec
253
SPEC
Insulation spec
270
THERMAL
INSULATION
SPEC
290 INSUL
Tracing spec
271
TRACING
SPEC
291 TRACE
Painting spec
272
PAINTING
SPEC
292 PAINT
User defined
293 to 297 null
293 to
string
2:111
PIPING
289 MATL
297
null
12.0

Examples:
SPECB COMP
Recognises changes in component specifications only.
SPECB BRAN
Recognises changes in branch specifications only.
SPECB BRAN SPECC ON

Recognises changes in branch specifications only, and
outputs specification changes for insulation, tracing and
paint.
2.3.84
Command Syntax:
>- SPECBreak -+- COMPonent* -.

|
|
- BRANch -----+- SPECChanges -+- ON ---.
|
|
|
|
- OFF* -+
|
|
------------------------+>
Querying:
Q SPECBreak
Q OPTions
SPLIT
Function:
Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a pipeline is

split over more than one sheet.
Description:
If a pipeline is too long or complex to fit on a single isometric

plot, ISODRAFT will automatically split the pipeline over
separate drawings. Each drawing will be identified as DRG 1 OF
..., DRG 2 OF ..., etc. You can control the relative complexity of
each drawing, or the number of drawings into which the
isometric is to be split, by using the SPLIT command.
You can control splitting either by giving a split factor, or by
specifying the number of drawings used for the isometric.
The default value of the split factor is 100. Note that this value
does not relate directly to either the number of fittings or the
amount of text on a sheet. It is a measure of the complexity of
the drawing, relative to its size, on an arbitrary scale.
Greater sheet complexity is specified by giving a split factor
greater than 100, and lower complexity by giving a split factor
less than 100.
You can control exactly where pipes are split by using Split
ATTAs in the design. If user-defined positions for splits have
been created in the design, ISODRAFT will always use these
and not calculate its own split points.
Split points in tube can be controlled by the TUBESPLITS
command.
2:112
12.0

Examples:
SPLIt 3 DRwgs
Splits the isometric into 3 drawings.
SPLIt 75 PERCent
Splits the isometric so that the complexity of each drawing
is 75% of the default.
Related
Commands:
ERASE REPEATABILITY TUBESPLITS
Restrictions:
Only single pipelines can be split into a fixed number of

drawings.
Command Syntax:
>--- SPLIt --- value ---+--- DRwgs -----.

|
|
--- PERCent ---+--->
The default is 100 percent.

Querying:
2.3.85
Q SPLIT
Q OPTions
SPOOLNUMBERS
Function:
Specifies how individual pipe spools are identified on isometrics.
Description:
SPOOLER can generate spool numbers per spool drawing.

These spool numbers are stored in the Fabrication DB and can
be imported into ISODRAFT by using the FROMDB command.
If you dont use the FROMDB option but switch spool numbering
on, ISODRAFT will number the spools. These numbers are not
maintained between sessions. The parameters that ISODRAFT
uses to number spools are as follows:
Spools are numbered sequentially from the start of the

pipeline. If a Tee is encountered, numbering continues
down the off-line leg before returning to the main line
sequence.
Spools are identified on the isometric plot by spool numbers

plotted in square brackets, e.g. [8], on the first leg of a pipe.
They are also listed at the end of the material list.
By default, spools are numbered continuously from one

drawing to the next. The command SPOOLNUMBERS
PERDrawing causes spool numbering to be restarted at 1
on each new drawing sheet. For details of how to plot pipe
spools on separate drawing sheets, see the ISOTYPE
command.
The PREFIX option can be used to combine the spool

numbers with either user-specified text or the SPLP
attribute of Pipe and Drawing in DESIGN. ISODRAFT can
insert generated sheet and spool numbers into a userdefined spool name if wildcard characters * are included in
the text.
2:113
12.0

Examples:
SPOOLN FROMDB
The spool numbers generated in the SPOOLER module
will be used by ISODRAFT in the isometric plot and spool
list.
SPOOLN PREF FROMDB

The spool numbers will be generated, with the prefix taken
from the DESIGN SPLP attribute.
SPOOLN ON
Spool numbers are generated by ISODRAFT and shown
on the pipes and below the material list.
SPOOLN OFF
Spool numbers are not shown at all.
SPOOLN PREF Tube Spec: PERD

Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, and
the prefix will be included in all spool numbers in the
drawing area. Spool numbering will restart at 1 on each
new drawing sheet.
SPOOLN PREF /PIPE1/DRE*/SPL*

Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, and
the sheet and spool numbers will be written into the prefix
name. So, for example, the identifier PIPE1/DRG2/SPL3
will be generated automatically for spool 3 of drawing 2 of
PIPE1. This format can only be used with the
SPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING option.
Related
Commands:
ISOTYPE
Command Syntax:
>-- SPOOlnumbers --+-|
|
|
|
|
|-|
|
|
|
|-|
|-|
--
PREFix - + - text ----.

|
|
- FROMDB -+- PERDrawing --.
|
|
---------------|
|
PERDrawing --+-- PREFix - + - text ---|
|
|
|
|
- FROMDB --|
------------------------|
|
FROMDB -------------------------------|
|
ON* ----------------------------------|
|
OFF ----------------------------------+-->
Note: * Spool numbers are generated for each isometric, with

no relationship to any data stored in the databases.
2:114
12.0

Restrictions:
The maximum number of spools per pipe is 99.

The maximum length of the spool prefix is 40 characters.
Querying:
2.3.86
Q SPOOLNumbers
Q OPTions
STACKINGARRANGEMENT
Function:
Positioning multiple plots on the paper.
Description:
When you are using multiple PLOT files, you can specify the
layout of the individual plots on the paper. You can align the
plots along the paper, that is with their long sides parallel to the
length of the paper, or across the paper, that is with their short
sides parallel to the length of the paper. You can specify how
many drawings should be plotted in the given direction.
The default format is STACKINGARRANGEMENT 1 ALONG
which produces a single row of drawings with their long sides
aligned with the length of the paper.
Note that you must ensure that there is enough room across the
width of the paper for the arrangement you have specified. The
length of the paper is specified in the FILE command.
The stacking facility has no meaning, and is ignored, when
single PLOT files are used.
Examples:
STACK 2 ACROSS
will orientate the drawing frames across the width of the
paper, two abreast:
direction
of paper
movement
2:115
12.0

STACK 3 ALONG
will orient the drawing frames along the width of the paper,
three high:
direction
of paper
movement
2.3.87
Related
Commands:
FILE SIZE
Command Syntax:
>--- STACkingarrangement -- value --+--- ALONg ---.

|
|
|--- ACROss ---|
|
|
--------------+-->
Querying:
Q STACkingarrangement
Q OPTions
SUPPORTFILENAME
Function:
Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule is

to be sent.
Description:
Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule is

to be sent. If the OVERWRITE option is included, any existing
file of the given name will be overwritten by the new schedule
data.
Examples:
SUPPORTF /SUP1
Sends the pipe support schedule to a file named SUP1.
SUPPORTF /SUP1 OVER

Overwrites the pipe support schedule in the file SUP1.
SUPPORTF OFF
Stops the pipe support schedule being written to a file.
Command Syntax:
>--- SUPPORTFilename --+-- name --+-- OVERwrite --.

|
|
|
|
---------------|
|
|
--- OFF* -----------------+-->
2:116
12.0

2.3.88
Restrictions:
For system isometrics, no information will be written to the

support file
Querying:
Q SUPPORTFilename
Q OPTions
SUPPORTS
Function:
Defines whether support positions are dimensioned as overall or

string dimensions, and whether supports are shown at all on the
isometric.
Description:
Support positions may be dimensioned in one of two ways,

overall or string. The default is SUPPORTS STRING. Support
information can also be omitted completely from the isometrics.
Note that the position of support dimensions, that is whether
they are on the same side or the opposite side to the string or
composite dimensions, is controlled by the DIMENSIONS
HANGERS command.
Examples:
SUPPorts
OVErall
Supports dimensioned from previous support.
SUPPorts
STRing
Supports dimensioned from previous component.
SUPPorts
OFF
No support information shown.
2.3.89
Related
Commands:
DIMENSIONS DIMDIST
Command Syntax:
>--- SUPPorts ---+--- STRing* ---.

|
|
|--- OVErall ---|
|
|
--- OFF -------+--->
Querying:
Q SUPPorts
Q OPTions
SYMBOLFILENAME
Function:
Specifies the name of a symbol library.
Description:
The SYMBOLFILENAME command loads a file of user-defined

symbols previously created in PDMS DRAFT. You can define
this file as read-only if you want to protect the symbol definitions
from subsequent modification.
2:117
12.0

Examples:
SYMBOLF /SYMFILE1
Command Syntax:
>- SYMBOLFilename -+- filename -+- READONLY -.

|
|
|
|
|- WRITE* ---|
|
|
|
|
------------+->
- OFF ->
Querying:
Q SYMBOLFilename
Lists the name and contents of the current symbol library. It will
not tell you what the listed symbols look like.
2.3.90
TAGGING
Function:
Allows you to identify individual components on the isometric

plot by means of name tags.
Description:
By default, component names are not plotted. Fittings of generic

type INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, VENT, VTWA and VFWA
can have their PDMS names (if they have them) shown against
their plotted symbols on the isometric.
If a component of a valid type exists in the pipeline but has not
been named when TAGGING ON is specified, ISODRAFT will
recognise that it has a system name only and will not plot any
name. However, if ITEMCODE ON has been specified the
component will be labelled with its itemcode.
2.3.91
Related
Commands:
INSTNAME
ITEMCODE
Command Syntax:
>--- TAGging ---+--- ON -----.

|
|
--- OFF* ---+--->
Querying:
Q TAGging
Q OPTions
TAPPING
Function:
Sets the scale of the tapping leg and switches tapping leg
dimensions and coordinates on and off.
Description:
The TAPPING command controls the display and scale of

tapping branches, that is offline connections to PCOMs, SHUs,
Flanges and Filters.
2:118
12.0

Examples:
TAPping SCALe 75
Sets the scale of the tapping leg to 75% of the default
value.
TAPping SCALe DEFault

Resets the default scale.
TAPping DIM ON
Switches tapping leg dimensions on.
TAPping DIM OFF

Switches tapping leg dimensions off.
TAPping DIM DEF

Reset to the default, which is dimensioning ON.
TAPping COORDS ON
Switches tapping leg coordinates on.
TAPping COOR OFF

Switches tapping leg coordinates off.
TAPping COORDS DEF

Resets to the default, which is coordinates off.
TAPping DEFault
Resets all tapping defaults, which sets the scale to 100%,
dimensioning to ON and plotting to OFF.
2.3.92
Command Syntax:
.-----------------<--------------------.
/
|
>-- TAPping --*--- SCALe ---+--- value -----.
|
|
|
|
|
|
--- DEFault ---+----------|
|
|
|--- DIMensions ----.
|
|
|
|
|--- COORdinates ---|
|
|
|
|
|--- COORDS --------+--- ON -------------|
|
|
|
|
|--- OFF ------------|
|
|
|
|
--- DEFault --------|
|
|
----------------------- DEFault --------+->
Querying:
Q TAPPIng
Q OPTIONS
TEXTPOSITION
See POSITION command.
2:119
12.0

2.3.93
TITLEBLOCK
Function:
Allows you to add extra text to the title block.
Description:
The title block is produced automatically. Extra text can be

added to the title block by using the TITLEBLOCK command,
followed by the line number and the text to be added.
Title block lines can be input in any order.
You can underline a line of text by putting the _ character
(underscore) at the end of the line.
You can create a vertical bar from the previous horizontal line
down to the next horizontal line by putting the | character
(vertical bar) in the text.
ISODRAFT will accept a maximum of 25 title block lines. Each
line may contain up to 39 characters (including spaces, but
excluding the underscore character).
Examples:
The following sequence will add the text illustrated below:
TITLE
TITLE
TITLE
TITLE
1
2
4
3
THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA

TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION
A VERTICAL LINE WITH |
TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE _
THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA

TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION
TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE
A VERTICAL LINE WITH
DATE: 24 JUL 87
PROJECT NO: VC12
BATCH REF: A16 /OG8 /CG14
PIPING SPEC: PS20
0-4201
ISS: 1
DRG NO
1 OF 2
Related
Commands:
DATE
POSITION
Command Syntax:
>--- TITleblock --- value ---+--- text ---.

|
|
-------------+--->
Querying:
Q TITleblock
Q TITleblock value
Q OPTions
2:120
12.0

2.3.94
TOLERANCE
Function:
Specifies the maximum misalignment between components

regarded as having the same axis.
Description:
By default, two components will be plotted as though they have

a common axis if the orientation of their axes differs by less than
0.06 degrees, or if their axes are offset by less than 1.00mm.
The TOLERANCE command allows you to specify a different
alignment tolerance, either as an angular difference or as a
linear offset.
Examples:
TOL OFFSET 0.125 INCH

Two components will be plotted as having a common axis
if their axes are offset by less than 0.125 inch.
TOL ANGLE 0.15

Two components will be plotted as having a common axis
if the orientations of their axes differ by less than 0.15
degrees.
TOL DEFAULT
Resets the default values of 1mm offset or 0.06 degrees
angular difference.
Restrictions:
If gaskets of less than 1mm thickness are detailed, a tolerance

offset of less than the gasket thickness must be set.
Care should be taken when specifying non-default values, since
large tolerances can cause falling lines to be shown incorrectly.
For reliable plotting of falling and skewed lines, a lower value
than the default (say TOL OFF 0.01) may be appropriate.
Command Syntax:
>--- TOLerance ---+--- OFFset --- <uval> ---.

|
|
|--- ANGle --- value -----|
|
|
--- DEFault -------------+--->
Querying:
Q TOLerance
Q OPTions
2:121
12.0

2.3.95
TRACINGCONTROL
Function:
Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted.
Description:
Any piping component which has its TSPEC attribute set may be
shown traced.
Insulation and tracing can be shown:
On tubing only
On tubing and pipe components
By default, tracing is not identified on the isometric.

The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will be
shown in the title block.
Examples:
TRAC ON
Shows tracing on the tube only, not on the pipe
TRAC TUBE
components.
TRAC ALL
Shows tracing on both tube and components.
TRAC OFF
Suppresses the display of tracing.
The default is TRACINGCONTROL TUBE.
Related
Commands:
INSULATIONCONTROL
Command Syntax:
>------ TRACingcontrol -------+--|

|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q TRACingcontrol
Q OPTions
2:122
ON ------.
|
TUBE* ---|
|
ALL -----|
|
OFF -----+--->
12.0

2.3.96
TRANSFERFILENAME
Function:
Allows you to save a transfer file generated during ISODRAFTs

data extraction operations, for subsequent processing.
Description:
The transfer file is not normally visible to you, but it can be

copied into an ASCII file by using the TRANsferfilename
command.
Any transfer file which currently exists with the specified
filename will be overwritten by the new file resulting from the
next DETAIL or CHECK command.
Note that transfer files produced by versions of ISODRAFT
before Version 10.3 are in binary format and cannot be
processed by the PROCESS TRANSFERFILE command.
Examples:
TRANSFER /TRANS
Saves the transfer file as a file named TRANS.
TRANSFER OFF
No transfer file will be produced.
Related
Commands:
PROCESS
Command Syntax:
>--- TRANsferfilename ---+--- filename ---.

|
|
--- OFF --------+--->
where filename is the name of a file in your working directory.

Querying:
2.3.97
Q TRANSferfilename
Q OPTIONS
TRUNCATE
Function:
Stops rounding remainders of dimensioning being added to the

next dimension.
Description:
When dimensioned isometrics are plotted, all dimensions are

rounded up or down to the nearest mm or 1/16 inch, depending
on the current output units. By default, ISODRAFT carries over
any remainder (positive or negative) from a rounded dimension
and adds it to the adjacent dimension. This process minimises
cumulative errors over a number of consecutive dimensions, but
it can result in identical fittings being shown with different lengths
(usually differing by 1mm or 1/16 inch).
2:123
12.0

You can specify that ISODRAFT is to truncate all dimensions.

The remainders from rounding of the individual dimensions will
then be discarded rather than added to the next dimension.
Remember that this can result in a significant cumulative error
over long pipelines with many individually dimensioned
components.
Examples:
2.3.98
TRUNcate ON
Truncates dimensions.
TRUNcate OFF
Does not truncate dimensions
TRUNcate DEFault
Does not truncate dimensions.
Command Syntax:
>--- TRUNcate ---+--- ON --------.

|
|
|--- OFF* ------|
|
|
--- DEFault ---+--->
Querying:
Q TRUNcate
Q OPTIONS
TUBESPLITS
Function:
Controls how splits in tube are placed.
Description:
ISODRAFT may generate splits in tube. You can use the

TUBESPLITS command to output a message if this happens, or
to stop isometrics with splits in tube being produced.
Examples:
TUBES OFF
This command will allow generation of isometrics with
splits in tube, but the message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT
POINT will be displayed. Repeatability information will not
be updated.
TUBES OFF NOP

Will prevent the generation of isometrics with splits in tube.
The message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT will be
written to the message file and the pipeline will be
rejected. Repeatability information will not be updated.
TUBES ON
Returns to the default condition of allowing splits in tube.
Command Syntax:
>-- TUBESplits --+-- ON ---------------------.

|
|
-- OFF --+-----------------|
|
|
--- NOPicture ---+--->
Querying:
Q TUBESPLITS
Q OPTIONS
2:124
12.0

2.3.99
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME
Function:
Allows you to plot ISODRAFTs output on top of background

plots previously created in a PDMS drawing module.
Description:
You can superimpose an ISODRAFT PLOT file onto an

underlay plot. This facility is used, for example, for underprinting
isometric plots with company-standard drawing sheet
information. You can specify up to eight underlay plots, giving
them numbers so that they can be switched off if required.
Examples:
UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE1
The drawing stored in the file /BKGRNDS/STYLE1 will be
plotted on the same sheet as the next isometric plot. By
default, this will be underlay number 1.
UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 2
The drawing stored in file /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 will be
plotted on the same sheet as the next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF
The plot given as underlay 1 will not be plotted with the
next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF 2
The plot given as underlay 2 will not be plotted with the
next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF ALL

No underlay will be plotted.
Related
Commands:
MARGIN RESERVE
Command Syntax:
>--- UNDerlayplotname --+-- filename --+-- integer --.

|
|
|
|
-------------|
|
|
--- OFF ------+-- integer --|
|
|
|-- ALL ------|
|
|
-------------+->
Restrictions:
The underlay plots must have the same sheet size as that
specified for the ISODRAFT output. If not, the command will be
ignored.
Querying:
Q UNDerlayplotname
Q UNDerlayplotname integer
Q OPTions
2:125
12.0

2.3.100 UNITS
Function:
Specifies units of measurement used for ISODRAFTs output.
Description:
The units used for length and bore dimensions on isometric

drawings can be specified independently from the units used for
input data.
By default, lengths along pipelines (for component
dimensioning, tube lengths, etc.) are shown in metric units, and
pipe bores are shown in imperial units.
Note: That input units are specified by the commands BORES
and DISTANCES.
Examples:
UNITS METRIC
Outputs metric lengths and metric bores.
UNITS IMPERIAL
Outputs
imperial
lengths
and
imperial
bores.
Measurements between 1 and 2 will be output in inches;
for example, 15.
UNITS IMPERIAL FT
Outputs
imperial
lengths
and
imperial
bores.
Measurements between 1 and 2 will be output in feet and
inches; for example, 13.
UNITS METIMP
Outputs metric lengths and imperial bores.
Related
Commands:
BORES
DISTANCES
Command Syntax:
>--- UNIts ---+--- METRic -----.

|
|
|--- IMPerial ---+--- FT ---.
|
|
|
|
----------|
|
|
--- METImp* ---------------+--->
Querying:
Q OUTPut UNIts
Q OPTions
Note: Q UNITS gives the current units for input measurements
(see BORE and DISTANCE commands), not output
measurements.
2:126
12.0

2.3.101 WASTAGE AREA
Function:
Defines wastage areas which can be given different wastage

factors for cut pipe lengths.
Description:
When cut pipe lengths are calculated, ISODRAFT can include

extra material to allow for wastage during cutting and
fabrication. A complete Plant can be split up into a maximum of
ten wastage areas, numbered 0 to 9, and each wastage area
can be allocated a wastage factor.
Default values for the wastage factors for areas 1-9 are all
1.
The wastage factor for area 0 is fixed at 1 (i.e. no wastage

allowance).
ISODRAFT uses the wastage factors to modify the cut pipe

lengths as follows:
In the DESIGN database, the EREC attribute for a pipe

branch can be set to an integer, which corresponds to the
wastage area for all tube in the Branch. EREC=10 is
treated as area 0, EREC=11 is treated as area 1, and so
on.
Each tube item may have, included in its Specification, a

standard wastage allowance (PWAS) in the form of an
added percentage.
When calculating a cut pipe length, ISODRAFT multiplies

the standard wastage allowance (PWAS) for the
appropriate type of tube by the wastage factor for the area
in which the length occurs (determined by the EREC for the
branch).
The corrected percentage allowance thus calculated is then

added to the nominal length of the pipe to give the cut
length which is plotted on the drawing.
Note: That a cut pipe list is only output if you have given the
CUTTINGLIST command.
Examples:
Consider a length of pipe connecting two components whose

separation measured along the pipe centreline is 1000mm.
Assume that the tube specification has PWAS set to 10; that is,
a 10% allowance is preset. Assume that the pipe length forms
part of a branch for which the EREC attribute has been set to 3.
Assume that the wastage factor for wastage area 3 has been set
to 1.2 by using the command
WASTAGE AREA 3 1.2

Then the wastage allowance calculated by ISODRAFT will be
(1000 x 10% x 1.2) mm, i.e. 120mm, and the cut pipe length
given on the isometric will be 1120mm.
Command Syntax:
.-------------<----------.
/
|
>--- WASTage ---*--- ARea integer value ---+--->
2:127
12.0

Restrictions:
ISODRAFT only includes a wastage allowance if WASTAGE

AREA has been set. The default is for no allowance, even if
PWAS has been set.
Querying:
Q WASTage
Q WASTage integer
Q OPTIONS
shows value for the area number

queried
2.3.102 WELDANGLES
Function:
Allows configuration in which one pipe is welded to another pipe

or component such that the flow directions of the two objects are
non-parallel.
Description:
The WELDANGLES command takes effect for configurations in

which one pipe is welded to another pipe or component such
that the flow directions of the two objects are non-parallel.
Toggling between the two states WELDANGLES ON and
WELDANGLES OFF allows the User to switch on/off the
functionality to accommodate oriented welds. The option may be
set on/off by the new toggle switch labelled 'Oriented weld
angles' on the Dimensioning Options form. The state
WELDANGLES ON requires that the User also specify a
minimum weld angle, WELDANGMIN (expressed in degrees),
as being the minimum angle at which the change of direction be
considered significant. In other words, for all angles greater than
or equal to that specified, the new behaviour for oriented welds
occurs; otherwise, the old behaviour (equivalent to
WELDANGLES OFF), occurs. If the user specifies
WELDANGLES ON, but does not specify a value for
WELDANGMIN, the default value of 0.1 is used. The value of
WELDANGMIN may be entered in the text box labelled
'Minimum weld angle' on the Dimensioning Options form. Note
that if the component welded to a pipe in such a non-parallel
configuration is of generic type (GTYPE) instrument (INST) or is
an eccentric reducer, the WELDANGLES ON option will have no
effect.
Examples
WELDANGLES OFF
Disables correct handling of oriented welds.
WELDANGLES ON WELDANGMIN 0.25

Enables correct handling of oriented welds for angles
greater than or equal to 0.25.
2:128
12.0

Command Syntax:
>-- WELDANGles --+-- ON -+- WELDANGmin - value --.

|
|
|
|
`-----------------------|
|
|
`-- OFF ------------------------+->
Querying:
Q WELDAngles
Q OPTions
2.3.103 WELDID
Function:
Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric by name.
Description:
Welds which have their NAME attribute set in the DESIGN

database can have their names plotted against their symbols on
the isometric.
By default, weld names are not shown on the isometric plot.
Related
Commands:
TAGGING WELDNUMBERS WELDTYPE
Command Syntax:
>--- WELDId ---+--- ON -----.

|
|
--- OFF* ---+--->
Querying:
Q WELDId
Q OPTions
2.3.104 WELDNUMBERS
Function:
Numbering the welds on an isometric.
Description:
The SPOOLER module allows

automatically, and store these
database. If this feature is used it
individual branch or to a spool
SPOOLER module.
you to set weld numbers

numbers in the DESIGN
applies to an individual pipe,
drawing as defined in the
The WELDNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to

access these numbers from the DESIGN database. When using
this feature, if ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered welds it
displays an error message and halts the drawing of the
isometric.
If the weld numbering feature of DESIGN or SPOOLER has not
been used, ISODRAFT can produce weld numbers according to
its own system defaults. However, these numbers are not
maintained between revisions.
2:129
12.0

Whether you generate weld numbers in DESIGN, SPOOLER or

in ISODRAFT, the size of the weld number characters can be
specified using the CHARHeight setting. A table of the weld
numbers can also be output onto the drawing sheet. The type of
weld to be numbered can be fabrication only, erection only, or
both. Weld numbering can be switched off completely, which is
the default.
Additional welds can be shown on the isometric either in
individual balloons or, if there are more than a specified number
of them, as an arrowed message in a single ellipse (with the
numbers separated by slashes).
Note: That if you used the SPOOLER module to generate weld
numbers, you can output a weld table on the isometric to
your own specifications using the POSITION command.
For generated weld numbers, the table has a fixed
position and content.
Examples:
WELDN CHARH 1.5 FAB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers with a character height
of 1.5mm.
WELDN CHARH 1.8 EREC BOX

Outputs erection weld numbers with a character height of
1.8mm, and tabulates them in a box immediately above
the title block.
WELDN CHARH 2.0 BOX

Outputs all weld numbers with a character height of
2.0mm in a table.
WELDN OFF
Suppresses the output of weld numbers.
WELDN FAB FROMDB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers from the DESIGN
database.
WELD CHARH 2 FAB AWELD BALLO 6

Output includes numbers for additional fabrication welds.
These will be shown in separate balloons if there are no
more than 6, otherwise they will be shown together in an
ellipse.
Related
Commands:
POSITION
WELDID
WELDTYPE
Command Syntax:
2:130
12.0

>- WELDNumbers -+- OFF ----------.

|
|
|- ON -----------|
|
|
CHARH- value -+- FABricationonly -.
|
|
|- ERECtiononly ----|
|
|
-------------------+- GENerated -.
|
|
|- FROMDB ----|
|
|
-------------+
|- NOBOX -.
|
|
|- BOX ---|
|
|
---------+--.
|
.----------------------------------<--------------------------------------'
|
--+- AWELD -+- BALLOon value -.
|
|
|
|
|- ELLIPse -------|
|
|
|
|
- OFF -----------+
|
|
---------------------------+->
Querying:
Q WELDNumbers
Q OPTIONS
2.3.105 WELDTYPE
Function:
Controls which types of end connection are to be shown on

isometric drawings.
Description:
By default, all types of end connection are shown on isometrics.

The WELDTYPE command specifies whether all end
connections, no end connections, only shop status end
connections or only site status end connections will be shown.
Examples:
WELDType FABrication
Only shop status end connections will be shown.
WELDType SITE
Only site status end connections will be shown.
WELDType ON
All types of end connection will be shown.
WELDType OFF
No end connections will be shown.
WELDType FORCesite
Shows all end connections as if they were shop status end
connections. For example, force site welds will be shown
as fabrication welds.
2:131
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- WELDType ---+--|

|--|
|--|
|--|
---
Querying:
Q WELDType
Q OPTIONS
ON* -----------.
|
OFF -----------|
|
SITE ----------|
|
FABrication ---|
|
FORCesite -----+--->
2.3.106 ZEROLENGTHSKEWS
Function:
Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.

When modelling falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets,
you can position a zero-length variable-angle bend at the offline
p-point of each Tee or Olet.
Description:
If falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets are modelled

with zero-length variable-angle bends at the offline p-point of
each Tee or Olet, you can connect a vertical Branch. The
ZEROLENGTHSKEWS command suppresses dimensioning
skewboxes for Butt Weld Tees or Olets in falling lines if zerolength bends have been included in the model.
Bends at Tees or Olets will only be considered as zero-length if
they are less than 0.5mm long. Bends with dimensions greater
than this will be detailed as normal components.
Examples:
ZEROlengthskews ON
Output skewboxes at vertical connections to falling lines.
ZEROlengthskews OFF
Suppress skewboxes at vertical connections to falling
lines.
Related
Commands:
FALLINGLINES
Command Syntax:
>--- ZEROlengthskews ---+--- ON* ---.

|
|
--- OFF ---+--->
2:132
12.0

Symbol Keys
Symbol Keys
Note: How to define symbol keys is described in the chapter Symbol Keys, of the
ISODRAFT User Guide.
3.1
Introduction
This appendix lists the symbol key (i.e. the SKEY text attribute) and the plotted symbol
used to identify each type of component on isometric drawings. There is a section for each
generic type. The sections are in alphabetic order of generic type:
BEND (see ELBOw)
See ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys.
CAP
See CAP Symbol Keys.
CLOSure
See CLOS Symbol Keys.
COUPling
See COUP Symbol Keys.
CROSs
See CROS Symbol Keys.
ELBOw
See ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys.
FBLInd (Blind Flange)
See FBLI Symbol Keys.
FILTer
See FILT Symbol Keys.
FLANge
See FLAN Symbol Keys.
FTUBe (Fixed-length
Tube)
See FTUB Symbol Keys.
INSTrument
See INST Symbol Keys.
LJSEnd (Lap Joint, Stub

End)
See LJSE Symbol Keys.
OLET (see TEE)
See TEE or OLET Symbol Keys.
PCOMponent
(Pipe Component)
See PCOM Symbol Keys
REDUcer
See REDU Symbol Keys.
SHU
See SHU Symbol Keys.
TEE
See TEE or OLET Symbol Keys.
3:1
12.0

Symbol Keys
TRAP
See TRAP Symbol Keys.
UNIOn
See UNIO Symbol Keys.
UNIVersal
See UNIVERSAL Symbol Key.
VALVe
See VALV Symbol Keys.
VENT
See VENT Symbol Keys.
VFWAy (Four-way Valve)
See VFWA Symbol Keys.
VTWAy (Three-way valve)
See VTWA Symbol Keys.
WELD
See WELD Symbol Keys.
FLOR (Pipe through floor)
See Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol.
Symbol Key Reference Index is an alphabetical list of symbol keys cross-referenced to the
generic types of the components to which they refer.The following information is given for
each SKEY:
3.1.1
Component description
The actual component description
SKEY
A four-letter identifier
Plotted symbol
The symbol plotted on isometrics, plus dimensions (in

mm)
P-points
The position and direction of the P-points with respect to

the plotted symbol. P-points needed to specify
components fully are shown against the symbols. P-points
which are optional are not shown, but their effects are
explained in the notes when appropriate.
Notes
The numbers in the right-hand column refer to the notes

at the end of each section.
P-points
When you define piping components in PARAGON, you must remember the following rules
so that ISODRAFT can produce isometrics correctly:
P0 is automatically set and defines the origin of the component.
For two-way components, the arrive and leave p-points must be numbered P1 and P2
(not necessarily in that order). For two-way valves, the spindle direction must be
indicated by P3.
For three-way components, the offline leg must be indicated by P3. The spindle
direction for three-way valves must be specified by using a p-point greater than P3,
which must have its bore unset.
For four-way components, the two straight-through flows must have p-points P1/P2
and P3/P4. The spindle direction for four-way valves must be specified by using a ppoint greater than P4, which must have its bore unset.
For eccentric reducers without a connection point, the flat side must be indicated
by P3. Eccentric reducers with a connection point must use P3, with a valid bore
set, to indicate the connection point and must use P9, with bore unset, for orientation of
the flat side.
3:2
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.2
For U-bends (defined as bends of more than 135 degrees), the p-points must be set as
shown for each symbol.
CAP Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Cap - Butt Weld
KABW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1
5.5
1 0 2
3.5
Cap Compression
KACP
1
3.75
1 0 2
2.0
Cap - Screwed
KASC
1
3.5
1 0 2
1.5
Cap - Socket Weld
KASW
D
3 .5
1 0 2
1 .5
Note:
1. The p-point configurations refer only to Caps used solely for blanking and are
positioned on the axis of the appropriate face (depending on type). Caps with different
p-point configurations, such as flipped Caps (where P1 is Pleave and P2 is Parrive) or
Caps used as Reducers, can result in incorrect output.
3:3
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.3
CLOS Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Pipe Block
Fixed Length
PF
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
0
1
4.75
2.5
Pipe Block
Variable Length
PV
0
4.5
2.5
3.4
COUP Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Nipple - Screwed
NRSC
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
2.0
4.0
Nipple - Screwed
NBSC
0
1.0
2.5
4.0
Coupling Compression
COCP
1.5
0
1
3.5
3.5
2
Coupling - Screwed
COSC
2.5
0
1
3.5
2
3:4
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Coupling - Socket
Weld
COSW
Plotted Symbol
2.5
8.0
CESW
8.0
6.5
Screwed Elbolet
CESC
6.5
Socket Weld Elbolet
0
1
CEBW
Note
D D
3.5
Butt Weld Elbolet
P-points
1
)
(
1.5
)
(
1.5
0
1
1
0
1
8.0
6.5
)
(
1.5
0
1
Note:
1. The dimensions of these components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the
LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.
3.5
CROS Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Cross - Butt Weld
CRBW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
2
3
0
4
Cross - Socket Weld
CRSW
Cross - Compression
CRCP
2
3
1
0
4
3:5
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Cross - Flanged
CRFL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
2
3
0
4
Cross - Screwed
CRSC
2
3
1
0
4
Cross - Set on
CRSO
1, 2
)
(
3
1 0 2
)
(
Cross - Set on
Reinforced
CRRF
1,2
REINFORCED
)
(
)
(
3
1 0 2
4
Cross - Generic Ytype with variable

angle out- and offlegs
X@**
3,4,5
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
VARIABLE
ANGLE
VARIABLE
ANGLE
0
4
Notes:
1. The positions of P3 and P4 along the vertical axis are important for deriving correct cut
pipe lengths. The vertical displacements of P3 and P4 are determined by the points at
which the offline legs intersect the main line. P0, P1, P2, P3 and P4 will be coincident
when the offline leg has the same bore as the main line.
2. The dimensions of all Cross components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
3. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
4. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the range
1 to 4, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned to the
largest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for X1**, X2**,
X3** or X4**.
3:6
12.0

Symbol Keys
5. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on the
tube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and flanged
representation on the component cannot be enforced. ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys
3.6
ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Elbow - Butt Weld (90

and 45 degree)
ELBW
Elbow - Butt Weld

with a Connection (90
and 45 degree)
ETBW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,9
1
0
1,5,9
2
Elbow - Butt Weld

180 degree Return (U
Elbow)
EUBW
Elbow Compression
(90 and 45 degree)
ELCP
2,9
4
1,9
1
0
Elbow Compression
with a Connection (90
and 45 degree)
ETCP
1,5,9
2
)
(
Elbow - Screwed with

Male Ends (90 and 45
degree)
EBSC
Elbow - Screwed with

Female Ends (90 and
45 degrees)
ELSC
)
(
1,9
1
0
1,9
3:7
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Elbow - Screwed Female

with
a
Connection (90 and
45 degree)
ETSC
Elbow - Socket Weld
ELSW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,5,9
2
)
(
)
(
1,9
1
0
Elbow - Socket Weld

with a Connection
ETSW
1,5,9
2
)
(
Elbow - Reducing
ER**
)
(
1,6
(
)
1
0
Bend - Flanged (all

angles)
BEFL
1,9
1
0
Bend - Flanged with a

Connection
(all
angles)
BTFL
1,5,9
2
)
(
Bend - Flanged 180

degree Return (U
Bend)
BUFL
Bend - Mitre
MIFL
)
(
2,9
4
1,9
1
0
Flanged Bend - Mitre

with a Connection
Flanged
MTFL
1,5,9
2
3:8
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Bend - Mitre
MIBW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,7,9
1
0
Bend - Mitre
MIPL
1,8,9
1
0
Butt Weld Bend Mitre

with
a
Connection
MTBW
1,5,9
2
Butt Weld Bend Mitre

with
a
Connection
MTPL
1,5,9
2
Bend - Lobster Back

Flanged
L@FL
1,3,9
1
0
Bend - Lobster Back

with a Connection
Flanged
T@FL
1,3,5,9
2
Bend - Lobster Back

Butt Weld
L@BW
1,3,9
1
0
Lobster Back Bend
L@PL
1,3,8,9
1
0
Bend - Lobster Back

with a Connection
T@BW
1,3,5,9
2
3:9
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Bend - Lobster Back

with a Connection
T@PL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,3,5,9
Bend - Pulled (All

Angles)
PB+D
1,4,9
1
0
Bend - Pulled 180

degree Return (U
Bend)
BU+D
Bend - Pulled with a

Connection
(All
Angles)
TB+D
2,4,9
4
1,4,5,9
2
Notes:
1. Generic types ELBO and BEND have a connection reference to facilitate connections
to the elbow or bend. ISODRAFT will always treat an elbow or bend as having an
offline leg if it has a P3 with a bore greater than zero. Care is needed when selecting a
symbol key and point set in order to achieve the required results.
2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram
and P3 should not have its bore set.
5
2
1
4
3. Replace the @ character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the number
of segments.
4. Replace the + character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the ratio of
the bend radius to the pipe bore.
5. The p-point for the offline connection (P3) can be positioned anywhere along the
horizontal (P1) axis that suits your specific component design.
6. Reducing elbows can have any of the end types BW, CP, FL, SC, or SW, but not PL.
7. This type of component is treated as a fitting in the material list.
8. This type of component is treated as tube in the material list.
3:10
12.0

Symbol Keys
9. The dimensions of all Elbow and Bend components depend upon plotted leg length.
The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the
3.7
FBLI Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Flange - Blind
FLBL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
4.5
1 0 2
2.5
Flange - Reducing
Concentric
FLRC
1
)
(
4.5
0
1
1.0
Flange Eccentric
Reducing
FLRE
1,2
)
(
4.5
10
2
1.0
Notes:
1. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight
their presence.
2. P3 is used only for orientation and will have its bore unset.
3.8
FILT Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Filter/Strainer Straight Through
FI**
Plotted Symbol
Note
1
4.5
0
1
8.0
Filter/Strainer - Angle
P-points
FA**
1,2
9.0
0
2
9.0
4.5
8.0
3:11
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Filter/Strainer - Offset
FO**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,3,5
6.0
6.0
8.0
Filter/Strainer Return
FR**
1,4
4.5
3
2
1
8.0
'Y'-type Filter/
Strainer
FY**
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:
P0
P2
P1
P0
P2
P1
P1
P0
P3
P3
P2
Plan
P1
P0
P1
P2
P3
End
P0
P3
P2
Side
Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be coplanar.
3:12
12.0

Symbol Keys
P2
P3
P0 P1
Note: That P3 is used only for orientation purposes and will have its bore unset. The
horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1(and similarly P2 and P3) may be
coincident.
5. Generic type FILT has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers.
If the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a parrive, a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side.
If the connection facility is to be used, P3 will be the connection p-point and as such
must have valid bore and orientation data for the connection. As the flat side can be
either in the same direction as the connection or directly opposite, a P9 p-point must be
used to give the orientation of the flat side.
3.9
FLAN Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Flange - Blind
FLBL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1 0 2
5.0
1.0
Flange -Flared/Loose
Backing
FLFL
1.0
1 0 2
)
( 5.0
3.5
Flange - Backing
FLLB
3.5
Flange Concentric
Reducing
1.0
)
(
1 0 2
5.0
FLRC
)
(
5.0
1.0
3:13
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
Flange Eccentric
SKEY
Reducing
Plotted Symbol
P-points
FLRE
Note
3
)
(
5.0
2
3
1.0
Flange - Screwed
FLSC
2.0
5.0
)
(
3.5
1.0
Flange - Slip On
FLSO
)
(
5.0
1.0
Flange - Slip On with
J Type Weld
FLSJ
)
(
5.5
1.0
Flange - Orifice Slip
On
FOSO
)
(
5.5
3
0 1
1.0
Flange - Socket Weld
FLSW
5.5
3.5
)
(
1.0 2.0
3:14
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Flange - Weld Neck
FLWN
Plotted Symbol
P-points
)
(
5.5
Note
4.0
Flange - Orifice Weld

Neck
FOWN
4
)
(
5.5
3
01
1.0 3.0
Notes:
1. To allow for the amount of pipe that normally passes through the component before
cutting or grinding off, a cutting allowance is included if the LOOSE attribute of the
flange is set to TRUE. This allowance is determined by the value of the ALLO attribute,
if set. If the ALLO attribute is not set (or set to zero), the allowance will default to
150mm.
However,
this
default
value
can
be
altered
by
the
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command.
2. The system used by previous version of the software (using intuitive P3 points) is still
supported.
3. To be used in conjunction with LJSE symbols FLRG or FLSE.
4. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight
their presence.
5. Orifice flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight their
presence.
3.10
FTUB Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Fixed Length Pipe With flanged ends
FPFL
Fixed Length Pipe Without flanged ends
FPPL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1
0
1
2.0
4.0
Fixed Length Pipe - to

be
displayed
and
stretched, like implied
tube on an isometric
TUBE
0
1
3:15
12.0

Symbol Keys
Notes:
1. The dimensions of all piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
3.11
INST Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Instrument
II**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,5
4.5
8.0
Instrument - Angle
IA**
9.0
1,2,5
4.0
9.0
4.0
Instrument - Offset
IO**
1,3
0
1
4.5
3
8.0
Instrument - Return
IR**
1,4
8.0
3
2
4.5
Instrument - Dial
IDPL
1
0
6.5 DIA
3
2
0
1
2
0
1
3.0
Instrument - Dial
Flanged
IDFL
6.5 DIA
3.0
0.25
Orifice Plate
OP
5.5
3.0
3.0
3:16
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Restrictor Plate
RP
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
0
1
5.5
1.0
3.0
Rupture Disk
DR
4.5
2.0
2.5
3.5
Valve - Angle Relief/

Vent
RA**
1,5
2.5
03
4.5
4.0
2
1
8.0
4.75
Valve - Angle Pressure

Reducing
XA**
1,5
2.5
4.5
03
4.0
8.0
4.75
Valve Control
CV**
1,5
4.0
1.5
2.0
4.0
03
6.5
Valve - Angle Control
CA**
1,5
4.0
2.0
2.5
4.0
03
3.25
4.75
Valve - 3 Way Control
C3**
1,5
4.0
1.75
2.25
4.0
9.25
4.75
0 4
1
3 2
4.75
C4**
1,5
9.25
4.0
8.0
4
05
1
3 2
4.75
Valve - Control Square

Indicator
SV**
1,5
4.5
2.0
3.5
4.0
03
14.0

Square Indicator
SA**
1,3
4.5
2.0
03
4.0
8.0
3:17
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY

Square Indicator
S3**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,5
4.5
4
0 2
3
2.0
3.75
4.0
4.75

Square Indicator
S4**
1,5
9.25
4.0
8.0
4.75
Valve
Control
Motorised Indicator
MV**
1,5
4.0
2.5
4.0
0 3
6.5

Motorised Indicator
MA**
1,5
4.0
2.5
4.0
03
8.0
6.5
2
4.5

Motorised Indicator
M3**
1,5
4.0
4
0
2
3
2.5
4.0
8.0
9.25
4.75

Motorised Indicator
M4**
1,5
9.25
3
1
4.0
8.0
4.75
Valve - Control Hand

Indicator
HV**
1,5
4.0
3.0
2.0
4.0
03
6.5

Hand Indicator
HA**
1,5
4.0
3.0
2.0
4.0
1
8.0
0
2
9.25
4.75
Valve - 3Way Control

Hand Indicator
H3**
1,5
4.0
3.25
2.75
4.0
1
8.0
4
0
2
3
9.25
4.75
3:18
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Valve - 4Way Control

Hand Indicator
H4**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,5
9.25
3
4.0
0
4
8.0
4.75
Valve
Reducing
Pressure
XV**
1,5
3.0
4.0
4.0
2.5
5.75
Valve - Relief/Vent
RV**
03
3.5
1,5
3.5
4.0
4.0
0 3
9.25
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
P0
P2
P1
3:19
12.0

Symbol Keys
P0
P2
P1
P1
P0
P3
P3
P2
Plan
P1
P0
P1
P2
P3
End
P0
P3
P2
Side
P2
P3
P0 P1
Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3) may
be coincident.
5. If an orientation p-point (P3) is present in the point set and is oriented away from the
XYZ axes, then the orientation of this p-point will be shown on the isometric.
6. Instrument dials can have a P3 with an unset bore for orienting the dial. This p-point will
normally be positioned perpendicular to the dial face, on the dial axis. A message will
be output near the component showing the orientation of P3.
3:20
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.12
LJSE Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Lap Joint Ring Loose
FLRG
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1
1.0
1 0 2
)
( 5.0
2.5
Lap Joint Stub End

Loose
FLSE
1.0
10
)
( 5.5
2.5
Note:
1. To be used in conjunction with FLAN symbol FLLB.
3.13
PCOM Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Block - Angle
BA**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
9.0
1,2
4.5
Note
9.0
4.5
Block - Offset
BO**
8.0
1,3
0
8.0
5.5
6.0
Block - Return
BR**
1,4
5.5
3
2
26
21.5
Expansion Bellows
EX**
01
0.7
3.4
5.6
3:21
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Flame Trap
FT**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
5.5
Note
01
5.0
Block - Angle
BA**
9.0
1,2
0
1
4.5
9.0
4.5
Flexible Hose
FX**
5.5
01
2.5
Hose Coupling
CH**
4.5
01
01
2.5
Non-category Item
NC**
4.5
2.5
Plug
PL
2.0
1.5
1 0 2
3.0
Restrictor Plate
2.5
RP
3.0
01
5.5
Sight Glass
SG**
1.0
5.5
1,5
5.5
4.4
3:22
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Slip Plate
SP
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
5,6
2.25
3
10
2.25
7.0
1.25
Slip Ring
SR
5,6
2.25
3
10
2.25
7.0
1.25
Spectacle Blind
SB
5,6
2.25
4.50
6.0
10
1.25
Tundish (Funnel)
TU**
4.0
2
5.0
8.0
0 1
3.0
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
3:23
12.0

Symbol Keys
P0
P2
P1
P0
P2
P1
P1
P0
P3
P3
P2
Plan
P1
P0
P1
P2
P3
End
P0
P3
P2
Side
P2
P3
P0 P1
be coincident.
3:24
12.0

Symbol Keys
5. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point will be
shown on the isometric.
6. The p-point set shown represents a typical arrangement for positioning and orienting
the component, but is not mandatory.
3.14
REDU Symbol Keys
3.14.1
Concentric Reducers
Component
Description
SKEY
Reducer - Concentric
Butt Weld
RCBW
Plotted Symbol
1
01
01
() 0.75
()
CPBW
1
6.5
3.5
Swaged from Pipe
Note
5.5
3.5
Fabricated from Plate
P-points
() 1.0
()
CSBW
1
6.5
01
3.5
with a Connection Butt
Weld
CTBW
with a Connection
CZBW
with a Connection
Swaged from Pipe
CXBW
() 1.0
()
1
6.5
3.5
() 1.0
()
01
1
6.5
3.5
() 1.0
()
01
1
6.5
3.5
3:25
()
() 1.0
01
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Compression
RCCP
Plotted Symbol
Note
1
5.5
4.0
Flanged
P-points
RCFL
CPFL
Swaged from Pipe
Flanged
CSFL
with a Connection
Flanged
CTFL
with a Connection
Flanged
CZFL
with a Connection
Swaged from Pipe
Flanged
CXFL
Nipple
RNSC
01
01
5.5
4.5
3.5
Flanged
01
3.0
5.5
4.5
3.5
5.5
01
4.5
3.5
5.5
3
4.5
3.5
1 0
5.5
3
4.5
3.5
1 0
5.5
3
4.5
3.5
1 0
6.5
3.5
3:26
1.0
1 0
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Screwed
RCSC
Plotted Symbol
1
1 0
with
a
Screwed
Connection
CTSC
Socket Weld
RCSW
with a Connection
Socket Weld
CTSW
Socket Weld Bush
RBSW
Special
Flange
RF
Note
5.5
3.5
Reducing
P-points
1.0
6.5
3.5
1.0
3
1 0
6.5
3.5
1.0
1 0
6.5
3.5
1.0
1 0
6.5
3.5
1.0
1 0
3.25
4.75
1.0
1 0
Note:
1. A concentric reducer with a connection point will have an additional p-point, P3, with a
valid bore. A concentric reducer without a connection will have only a p-arrive and pleave, as shown.
3:27
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.14.2
Eccentric Reducers
Component
Description
Reducer Butt Weld
SKEY
Eccentric
Plotted Symbol
REBW
P-points
Note
1,2
5.5
5.5
)
(
)
(
2.0
1 0
Reducer - Eccentric
EPBW
1,2
5.5
5.5
)
(
)
(
2.0
1 0
Reducer - Eccentric
Swaged from Pipe
ESBW
5.5
5.5
)
(
)
(
2.0
1 0
Reducer - Eccentric
with a Connection Butt
Weld
OTBW
1,2
6.5
5.5
2.0
10
Reducer - Eccentric
with a Connection
EZBW
5.5
Eccentric
1,2
3
2.0
EXBW
1,2
6.5
5.5
2.0
10
Reducer Screwed
6.5
10
Reducer - Eccentric
with a Connection
Swaged from Pipe
RESC
6.5
5.5
3:28
2.0
10
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Reducer - Eccentric
with a Connection
Screwed
Plotted Symbol
P-points
1,2
5.5
OTSC
5.5
)
(
)
(
2.0
10
Reducer
Flanged
Eccentric
Reducer - Eccentric
Flanged
EPFL
Reducer
Swaged
Flanged
- Eccentric
from Pipe
ESFL
Reducer
with a
Flanged
OTFL
10
1.5
10
1.5
10
5.6
5.6
1.5
5.6
Reducer
with a
Swaged
Flanged
EXFL
1,2
4.8
EZFL
1,2
4.8
Reducer - Eccentric
with a Connection
Flanged
1,2
4.8
10
Eccentric
Connection
from Pipe
1,2
1.5
5.6
REFL
4.8
Eccentric
Connection
Note
1,2
4.8
1.5
5.6
10
1,2
4.8
1.5
5.6
10
Notes:
1. Generic type REDU has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers. If
the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a p-arrive,
a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side. If the connection facility is to be used, P3
will be the connection p-point and as such must have valid bore and orientation data for
the connection. As the flat side can be either in the same direction as the connection or
directly opposite, a P9 p-point must be used to give the orientation of the flat side.
2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point will be
shown on the isometric.
3:29
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.15
SHU Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Plotted Symbol
Non-Category Item
P-points
Note
1,2
6.5
NC**
4.5
1 0
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. SHU elements have a CRFA attribute allowing up to 10 connection points.
3.16
TEE or OLET Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Olet - Half Coupling

e.g. Screwed (Picture
shows screwed but can
be any connection
type)
HC**
Olet - Half Coupling

e.g. Socket Weld
HC**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
7
)
(
)
(
3.0
1 0 2
3.0
7
()
()
3.0
1 0 2
3.0
Olet - Latrolet e.g. Butt

Weld
LA**
3.2
()
()
1 0 2
4.8
3:30
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Olet - Latrolet
e.g. Screwed
LA**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
3.2
()
()
Note
1 0 2
4.8
Olet - Latrolet
e.g. Socket Weld
LA**
3
3.2
()
()
1 0 2
4.8
Olet - Nipolet
e.g. Screwed
NI**
1.0
3
1 0 2
5.0
()
()
3.5
Olet - Nipolet e.g. Plain

Ended
NI**
1.0
3
5.0
)
(
4.0
Olet - Sockolet
)
(
1 0 2
SK**
4.0
()
()
1 0 2
5.5
Olet - Sweepolet
SW**
4.0
()
()
1 0 2
5.5
Olet - Thredolet
TH**
3.5
3
1 0 2
4.0
)
(
)
(
5.5
3:31
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Olet - Weldolet
WT**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
3.5
3
1 0 2
4.0
)
(
)
(
5.5
Olet - Instrument
Flanged
ITFL
5.5
3
0
8.0
5.0
Tee - Butt Weld
TEBW
2,3,7
VARIABLE
ANGLE
()
Tee - Compression
TECP
()
2,3
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
()
Tee - Flanged
TEFL
()
2,3
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
0
Tee - Screwed
TESC
2,3
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
Tee - Set-on
TESO
()
()
1,2,7
VARIABLE
ANGLE
()
Tee - Set-on
Reinforced
()
TERF
1 0 2
1,2,7
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
REINFORCED
()
3:32
()
1 0 2
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Tee - Pulled
TPUL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,2,7
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
()
Tee - Socket Weld
1 0 2
()
TESW
2,3,7
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
Tee - Swept Branch

Butt Weld
2,7
()
2,7
3
0
TSCP
2,7
3
()
TSSW
2,7
3
()
()
Tee - Generic Y-type

with variable angle outand offlegs
TSFL
()
Tee - Swept Branch

Socket Weld
Tee - Swept Branch

Compression
TSBW
()
Tee - Swept Branch

Flanged
()
()
Y@**
4,5,6,7
VARIABLE
ANGLE
3
1
VARIABLE
ANGLE
Notes:
1. The position of P3 along the perpendicular axis is important for deriving the cut pipe
length. The perpendicular displacement of P3 is determined by the point at which the
offline leg intersects the main line. For TESO and TERF, the distance P0 to P3 must not
exceed half the main bore; P0, P1, P2 and P3 will be coincident when the offline leg
has the same bore as the main line. For TPUL, the distance P0 to P3 must exceed half
the main bore. If the position of P3 does not follow these rules, any weld shown at the
intersection may appear in the wrong place.
2. The dimensions of piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
3. The TEBW, TECP, TEFL, TESC and TESW SKEYs can be used for laterals.
3:33
12.0

Symbol Keys
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
5. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the range
1 to 3, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned to the
largest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for Y1**, Y2**
or Y3**.
6. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on the
tube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and flanged
representation on the component cannot be enforced.
7. The presence of an offset P3 may be indicated. The P3 connection of the tee/olet must
be connected directly to a tube. The default behaviour is that, if an offset P3
configuration is present, a new ATEXT characterising the offset is output upon the
drawing. This new ATEXT is number 233 in the list of ATEXTs and its default value is
BRANCH OFFSET BY followed by the nonzero relative coordinates of the offset.
3.17
TRAP Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Trap - In Line (Straight

Through)
TI**
Plotted Symbol
8.0
P-points
Note
10
4.5
Trap - Angle
TA**
9.25
1,2
0
1
4.0
8.0
4.5
Trap - Offset
TO**
8.0
6.0
Trap - Return
TR**
1,3
0
1
8.0
2
3
1,4
5.0
3
2
0
1
21.5
26.0
Notes:
identifiers:
3:34
12.0

Symbol Keys
BW for butt weld

CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
P0
P2
P1
P0
P2
P1
P1
P0
P3
P3
P2
Plan
P1
P0
P1
P2
P3
End
P0
P3
P2
Side
P3 must not have a valid bore. It is used only to obtain correct orientation of the
element.
P3 can be orientated in PARAGON.
3:35
12.0

Symbol Keys
P2
P3
P0 P1
be coincident.
3.18
UNIO Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Union - Screwed
UNSC
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
5.5
10
10
10
2.5
Union - Socket Weld
UNSW
5.5
2.5
Union - Butt Weld
UNBW
5.5
2.5
3.19
UNIVERSAL Symbol Key

Component
Description
SKEY
Universal key for

generic type PCOM
UNIV
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,2
10 mm
Notes:
1. Radius of circle is controlled by percentage scale factor attribute, SkeyScale, on SDTE
element (100% = 10mm). Symbol also has a line from circumference to each
connection point.
2. UNIV Skey implies no end connection information. To flag end connections, the PSkey
on each p-point must be set to one of the following end condition identifiers:
3:36
12.0

Symbol Keys
BW for butt weld

CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain (default if unset)
3.20
VALV Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Valve - Angle
AV**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,2
9.25
4.0
03
1
8.0
2
4.75
Valve - Angle Pressure

Reducing
AX**
1,2
9.25
03
4.0
8.0
2
4.75
Valve - Angle Relief/

Vent
AR**
1,2
9.25
03
4.0
8.0
2
4.75
Valve - Ball
VB**
1,2
9.25
1
0 3
4.0
3.0
Valve - Basic
VV**
1,2
1
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Butterfly
VY**
1,2
1
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Check
VC**
4.0
0
2
1,2
9.25
3:37
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Valve - Check
CK**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
0
2
1,2
4.0
9.0
Valve - Cock
VK**
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Diaphragm
VD**
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Gate
VT**
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Globe
VG**
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Needle
VN**
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Plug
VP**
1,2
1
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve
Reducing
Pressure
VX**
1,2
4.0
2.5
9.25
3:38
0 3
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Valve - Relief/Vent
VR**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Valve - Slide
VS**
1,2
4.0
0 3
9.25
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, then ISODRAFT will output the
orientation of this p-point unless it is oriented in a primary direction (X, Y, Z etc.)
3.21
VENT Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Rupture Disk
RD
Plotted Symbol
P-points
10
2.5
Note
7.75
3.22
VFWA Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Valve - 4 Way
V4**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,2
9.25
4.0
8.0
4.5
3:39
0 5
4
12.0

Symbol Keys
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-point will
be shown on the isometric.
3.23
VTWA Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Valve - 3 Way
V3**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1,2
9.25
04
4.0
8.0
2
3
4.5
Notes:
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-point will
be shown on the isometric.
3:40
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.24
WELD Symbol Keys

Component
Description
SKEY
Weld - Site
WS
Plotted Symbol
4.0
P-points
Note
1 0 2
4.0
Weld - Field Fitted
WF
FFW
4.0
1 0 2
4.0
Weld - Shop
WW
1 0 2
3.25
Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol

Component
Description
SKEY
Pipe passing through

floor
FLOR
Plotted Symbol
Note
1,2,3
Notes:
1. Same rules apply as those used for positioning the FLOW ARROW symbol (see In-line
Components, Including Straight-through Valves in the ISODRAFT User Guide).
2. Must only be positioned in vertical sections of pipeline.
3. ISODRAFT will automatically orientate the fitting shape to suit the up/down direction of
the pipeline.
3:41
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.26
Welded Lug Symbol Keys
Component
Description
SKEY
Welded Circular Lug
WLC
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1.0
3
5.0
)
(
4.0
Welded
Lug
Rectangular
1.0
WLR
5.0
)
(
4.0
3.27
1 0 2
)
(
)
(
1 0 2
Symbol Key Reference Index

This section lists all available symbol keys (SKEYs) in alphabetic order. Cross-references
are given to the generic component types (GTYPEs) under which you will find them
described in the preceding sections of this appendix (if appropriate).
Each SKEY has an indication of whether or not it may be redefined, as explained in the
ISODRAFT User Guide, Section 11.1, The Basic Principles. For components which include
spindles, the standard spindle type associated with the predefined SKEY is indicated, see
the ISODRAFT User Guide Section 11.3, Special Keys, for illustrations of these spindle
types.
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
SPINDLE
TYPE
AR**
VALV
Angled Pressure Reducing Valve
Yes
09SP
AV**
VALV
Angled Valve
Yes
01SP
AX**
VALV
Angled Relief Valve or Vent
Yes
02SP
BA**
PCOM
Angle Block
No
BEFL
BEND
Flanged Bend
No
BO**
PCOM
Offset Block
Yes
BR**
PCOM
Return Block
No
BTFL
BEND
Flanged Bend with Tee
No
BU+D
BEND
Pulled Return Bend
No
BUFL
BEND
Flanged Return Bend
No
C3**
INST
3-Way Control Valve
No
13SP
C4**
INST
4-Way Control Valve
No
13SP
3:42
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
SPINDLE
TYPE
CA**
INST
Angled Control Valve
Yes
13SP
CEBW
COUP
Butt Weld Elbolet
Yes
CESC
COUP
Screwed Fitting Elbolet
Yes
CESW
COUP
Socket Weld Elbolet
Yes
CH**
PCOM
Hose Coupling
Yes
CK**
VALV
Check Valve
Yes
COCP
COUP
Compression Fitting Coupling
Yes
COSC
COUP
Screwed Fitting Coupling
Yes
COSW
COUP
Socket Weld Coupling
Yes
CPBW
REDU
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer
Yes
CPFL
REDU
Flanged Concentric Reducer
Yes
CRBW
CROS
Butt Weld Cross
No
CRCP
CROS
Compression Fitting Cross
No
CRFL
CROS
Flanged Cross
No
CRRF
CROS
Set On Reinforced Cross
No
CRSC
CROS
Screwed Fitting Cross
No
CRSO
CROS
Set On Cross
CRSW
CROS
Socket Weld Cross
No
CSBW
REDU
Yes
CSFL
REDU
Yes
CTBW
REDU
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes

with Tee
CTFL
REDU
Flanged Concentric Reducer with Yes

Tee
CTSC
REDU
Screwed Fitting Concentric with Yes

Tee
CTSW
REDU
Socket Weld Concentric Reducer Yes

with Tee
CV**
INST
Control Valve
CXBW
REDU

with Tee
CXFL
REDU

Tee
No
Yes
3:43
13SP
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
CZBW
REDU

with Tee
CZFL
REDU

Tee
DR
INST
Rupture Disc
Yes
EBSC
ELBO
Screwed Fitting (Male) Elbow
No
ELBW
ELBO
Butt Weld Elbow
No
ELCP
ELBO
Compression Fitting Elbow
No
ELSC
ELBO
Screwed Fitting Elbow
No
ELSW
ELBO
Socket Weld Elbow
No
EPBW
REDU
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer
Yes
EPFL
REDU
Flanged Eccentric Reducer
Yes
ER**
ELBO
Reducing Elbow
No
ESBW
REDU
Yes
ESFL
REDU
Yes
ETBW
ELBO
Butt Weld Elbow with Tee
No
ETCP
ELBO
Compression Fitting Elbow with No

Tee
ETSC
ELBO
Screwed Fitting Elbow with Tee
No
ETSW
ELBO
Socket Weld Elbow with Tee
No
EUBW
ELBO
Butt Weld Return Elbow
No
EX**
PCOM
Expansion Bellows
Yes
EXBW
REDU
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer with Yes

Tee
EXFL
REDU
Flanged Eccentric Reducer with Yes

Tee
EZBW
REDU

Tee
EZFL
REDU

Tee
FA**
FILT
Angled Filter
No
FI**
FILT
Straight-Through (In-Line) Filter
Yes
FLBL
FLAN
Blind or Blanking Flange
Yes
FLBL
FBLI
Blind or Blanking Flange
Yes
3:44
SPINDLE
TYPE
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
FLFL
FLAN
Flared Flange
Yes
FLLB
FLAN
Loose Backing Flange
Yes
Flow Arrow
Yes
FLOW
SPINDLE
TYPE
FLRC
FLAN
Reducing Flange
Yes
FLRC
FBLI
Reducing Flange
Yes
FLRE
FLAN
Eccentric Reducing Flange
Yes
FLRE
FBLI
Eccentric Reducing Flange
Yes
FLRG
LJSE
Lap Joint Ring
No
FLOR
ATTA
Floor Penetration Type ATTA
Yes
FLSC
FLAN
Screwed Fitting Flange
Yes
FLSE
LJSE
Lap Joint Stub End
No
FLSJ
FLAN
Slip-on J-Type Welded Flange
Yes
FLSW
FLAN
Socket Weld Flange
Yes
FLSO
FLAN
Slip-on Flange
Yes
FLWN
FLAN
Weld Neck Flange
Yes
FO**
FILT
Offset Filter
Yes
FY**
FILT
Y-type Filter/Strainer
Yes
FOSO
FLAN
Slip-on Flange with Orifice
Yes
FOWN
FLAN
Weld Neck Flange with Orifice
Yes
FPFL
FTUB
Fixed Length Pipe with Flanged No

Ends
FPPL
FTUB
Fixed Length Pipe with Plain Ends
Yes
FR**
FILT
Return Filter
No
FT**
PCOM
Flame Trap
Yes
FX**
PCOM
Flexible Hose
Yes
H3**
INST
3-Way Control Valve
No
12SP
H4**
INST
4-Way Control Valve
No
12SP
HA**
INST
Yes
12SP
HC**
OLET
Screwed Half Coupling
Yes
HC**
OLET
Socket Weld Half Coupling
Yes
HV**
INST
Control Valve
Yes
IA**
INST
Angled Instrument
Yes
3:45
12SP
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
IDFL
INST
Flanged Instrument with Dial
No
IDPL
INST
Instrument with Dial
No
II**
INST
Instrument
Yes
IO**
INST
Offset Instrument
Yes
IR**
INST
Return Instrument
No
ITFL
OLET
Flanged Instrument Tee
No
KABW
CAP
Butt Weld Cap
Yes
KACP
CAP
Compression Fitting Cap
Yes
KASC
CAP
Screwed Fitting Cap
Yes
KASW
CAP
Socket Weld Cap
Yes
L@BW
BEND
Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend
No
L@FL
BEND
Flanged Lobster Back Bend
No
LA**
OLET
Butt Weld Latrolet
Yes
LA**
OLET
Screwed Fitting Latrolet
Yes
LA**
OLET
Socket Weld Latrolet
Yes
M3**
INST
3-Way Motorised Valve
No
M4**
INST
4-Way Motorised Valve
No
MA**
INST
Yes
MIBW
BEND
Butt Weld Mitred Bend
No
MIFL
BEND
Flanged Mitred Bend
No
MTBW
BEND
Butt Weld Mitred Bend with Tee
No
MTFL
BEND
Flanged Mitred Bend with Tee
No
MV**
INST
Motorised Valve
Yes
NBSC
COUP
Screwed Nipple
Yes
NC**
PCOM
Non-Category Item
Yes
NC**
SHU
Non-Category Item
Yes
NI**
OLET
Plain End Nipolet
Yes
NI**
OLET
Screwed Fitting Nipolet
Yes
NRSC
COUP
Screwed Fitting Nipple
Yes
OP
INST
Orifice Plate
Yes
OTBW
REDU

Tee
3:46
SPINDLE
TYPE
11SP
11SP
11SP
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
OTFL
REDU

Tee
OTSC
REDU
Screwed Fitting Eccentric Reducer Yes

with Tee
PB+D
BEND
Pulled Bend
No
PF
CLOS
Fixed Length Pipe Block
Yes
PL
PCOM
Plug
Yes
PV
CLOS
Variable Length Pipe Block
Yes
PR
INST
Restrictor Plate
Yes
RA**
INST
Angled Relief Valve
Yes
RBSC
REDU
Screwed
Fitting
Reducing Bush
Concentric Yes
RBSW
REDU
Socket Weld Concentric Reducing Yes

Bush
RCBW
REDU
RCCP
REDU
Compression Fitting Concentric Yes

Reducer
RCFL
REDU
RCSC
REDU
Screwed
Reducer
RCSW
REDU
Socket Weld Concentric Reducer
Yes
RD
VENT
Rupture Disc
Yes
REBW
REDU
Yes
REFL
REDU
Yes
RESC
REDU
Screwed Fitting Eccentric Reducer Yes
RF
REDU
Special Reducing Flange
Yes
RNSC
REDU
Nipple Fitting Concentric Reducer
Yes
RP
PCOM
Restrictor Plate
Yes
RV**
INST
Relief Valve
Yes
S3**
INST
3-Way Control Valve with Square No

Indicator
10SP
S4**
INST
4-Way Control Valve with Square No

Indicator
10SP
SA**
INST
Angled Control Valve with Square Yes

Indicator
10SP
Fitting
3:47
SPINDLE
TYPE
02SP
Yes
Yes
Concentric Yes
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
SB
PCOM
Spectacle Blind
Yes
SG**
PCOM
Sight Glass
Yes
SK**
OLET
Socket Weld Sockolet
Yes
SP
PCOM
Slip Plate
Yes
SR
PCOM
Slip Ring
Yes
SV**
INST
Control
Valve
Indicator
SW**
OLET
Butt Weld Sweepolet
T@BW
BEND
Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend with No

Tee
T@FL
BEND
Flanged Lobster Back Bend with No

Tee
TA**
TRAP
Angled Trap
No
TB+D
BEND
Pulled Bend with Tee
No
TEBW
TEE
Butt Weld Tee
No
TECP
TEE
Compression Fitting Tee
No
TEFL
TEE
Flanged Tee
No
TESC
TEE
Screwed Fitting Tee
No
TESO
TEE
Set On Tee
No
TERF
TEE
Reinforced Tee
No
TESW
TEE
Socket Weld Tee
No
TH**
OLET
Screwed Fitting Thredolet
Yes
TI**
TRAP
In-line Trap
Yes
TO**
TRAP
Offset Trap
Yes
TR**
TRAP
Return Trap
No
TPUL
TEE
Pulled Tee
No
TSBW
TEE
Butt Weld Swept Tee
No
TSCP
TEE
Compression Fitting Swept Tee
No
TSFL
TEE
Flanged Swept Tee
No
TSSW
TEE
Socket Weld Swept Tee
No
TU**
PCOM
Tundish or Funnel
Yes
UNSC
UNIO
Screwed Fitting Union
Yes
UNSW
UNIO
Socket Weld Union
Yes
3:48
with
Square Yes
SPINDLE
TYPE
10SP
Yes
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY
GTYPE
COMPONENT
USER
DEFINABLE?
UNBW
UNIO
Butt Weld Union
Yes
UNIV
PCOM
Universal Skey for special fittings
See
AVEVA PDMS
ISODRAFT
User Guide
V3**
VTWA
3-Way Valve
No
01SP
V4**
VFWA
4-Way Valve
No
01SP
VB**
VALV
Ball Valve
Yes
03SP
VC**
VALV
Check Valve
Yes
VD**
VALV
Diaphragm Valve
Yes
01SP
VG**
VALV
Globe Valve
Yes
01SP
VK**
VALV
Cock Valve
Yes
03SP
VN**
VALV
Needle Valve
Yes
06SP
VP**
VALV
Plug Valve
Yes
07SP
VR**
VALV
Relief Valve
Yes
02SP
VS**
VALV
Slide Valve
Yes
08SP
VT**
VALV
Gate Valve
Yes
05SP
VV**
VALV
Basic Valve
Yes
01SP
VX**
VALV
Pressure Reducing Valve
Yes
09SP
VY**
VALV
Butterfly Valve
Yes
03SP
WF
WELD
Field Fitted Weld
No
WS
WELD
Site Weld
No
WTBW
OLET
Butt Weld Weldolet
Yes
WW
WELD
Shop Weld
No
XA**
INST
Angled Pressure Reducing Valve
Yes
09SP
XV**
INST
Pressure Reducing Valve
Yes
09SP
X@**
CROS
Generic Y-type Cross with user- Yes

definable out- and offlegs
Y@**
TEE
Generic Y-type Tee with user- Yes

definable out- and offlegs
01HG
SPINDLE
TYPE
Hanger (As a basis for user- Yes

defined hangers; see ISODRAFT
User Guide, Section 10.4, Defining
a New Hanger)
3:49
12.0

Symbol Keys
Note: ** denotes any of the following connection types:
BW
Butt Weld
CP
Compression Fitting
FL
Flange
SC
Screwed Fitting
SW
Socket Weld
PL
Plain
in Bends, denotes the number of bend segments (range 1-9)

in X-type and Y-type Crosses/Tees, replaced by an integer in the range 1 to 4, 1
indicating the largest bore, 4 indicating the smallest bore.
denotes the ratio of the bend radius to the pipe bore (range 1-9)
3:50
12.0

Alternative Texts
Alternative Texts
4.1
Introduction
You can change or remove all the text on isometric drawings using the ATEXT command.
This appendix lists the default settings of the text phrases, with their reference numbers.
The alternative texts (Atexts) have been broken down under the following headings:
Isometric Drawing Area
Title Block Area
Plotted Material List
Line Summary Area
Printed Material List
Weld Box Summary
Bend Table
Dynamic Detail Areas
Bolt Report
If an Atext is made blank, any additional information that may have been drawn in or
appended to the corresponding area will be suppressed.
4.2
Isometric Drawing Area

201 E
Denotes east in coordinates
202 N
Denotes north in coordinates
203 W
Denotes west in coordinates
204 S
Denotes south in coordinates
205 EL +
Denotes a positive elevation in coordinates (up)
206 EL -
Denotes a negative elevation in coordinates (down)
207 NS
Denotes a pipes nominal size (bore)
208 CONN. TO
Denotes CONNected TO, where a pipe end is connected to

a nozzle
4:1
12.0

Alternative Texts
209 CONT. ON
Denotes CONTinued ON, where a pipe is continued on

another drawing sheet. See also Atext 276.
210 F
Denotes a flange (used as the material list pointer for

flanges)
211 G
Denotes a gasket (used as the material list pointer for

gaskets)
212 B
Denotes a bolt (used as the material list pointer for bolts)
213 SPINDLE
Used to show the spindle direction of a valve when it is not a

primary direction
214 MM
Denotes millimetres (used at angle valves etc.)
215 REDUCING
FLANGE
Message pointing to any reducing flange
216 OFFSET
Message used where an offset occurs. For example, at

eccentric reducers, offset reducing flanges, offset blocks
etc.
279 L
Denotes a lap joint stub end (used as the material list

pointer for LJSEs)
217 MITRE
Denotes mitre-type bend (see also Atext 231)
218 LOBSTER
Denotes lobster-type bend (see also Atext 231)
219 REINFORCED
Message pointing to any reinforced tee (symbol key TERF)
220 LEFT LOOSE
Message pointing to any flange where attribute LOOSE is

set to TRUE
221 FFW
Message pointing to any field-fitted weld (symbol key WF)
222 FALL
Denotes a falling pipeline.
223
If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the symbol for

falling lines specified in degrees
224 :
Used for falling lines specified as a ratio (e.g. 1:10)
225
If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the % symbol

for falling lines specified as a percentage
226 GRAD
Used for falling lines specified in grads
227 PER M
Used for falling lines specified in metric units, to indicate

millimetres per metre
228 PER FT
Used for falling lines specified in imperial units, to indicate

inches per foot
229 SCREWED END
Message pointing to any open ended pipe whose HCON or

TCON is set to SCRD
230 VENT
Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is

set to VENT
4:2
12.0

Alternative Texts
231 BEND
Associated with Atexts 217 and 218.
236 S
Denotes that a support exists at a component.
237
Indicates inches
238
Indicates feet
239 DRAIN
Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is

set to DRAN
240
This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a

message at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to
OPEN.
241

message at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to
CLOS.
242

message at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is not one
of the recognised ends; i.e. not SCRD, VENT, DRAN, OPEN
or CLOS.
243
This Atext is blank by default. If it is set to any word (e.g.

FLAT), eccentric reducers will have the orientation of their
flat side indicated by that word.
Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247,
248 and 249.
See also the note following Atext 283.
244 UP
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
245 DOWN
246 NORTH
247 SOUTH
248 EAST
249 WEST
275 SWEPT TEE
Message pointing to any tee whose symbol key is TSBW
276 CONT. FROM
Denotes CONTinued FROM, where a pipe is continued from

another drawing sheet.
See also Atext 255 in Title Block Area.
277 ORIFICE FLANGE
Message pointing to orifice flanges
278 DIAL FACE
Message pointing to instrument dials (symbol keys IDPL

and IDFL)
280 TAPPING
Message pointing to orifice plates
281 TAIL
Message pointing to spectacle blinds and slip plates
282 WINDOW
Message pointing to sight glasses
4:3
12.0

Alternative Texts
283 FLAT
Used to indicate the orientation of the flat side of an

eccentric reducer when the reducer is skewed.
Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247,
248 and 249.
See also the following note.
284 TEE BEND
Message pointing to bends that have an offline leg
286
This Atext is blank by default. If it is set, a message will be

output at screwed erection fittings.
287 ORIENTATION
DIRECTION
Shows the orientation of a skewed olet which has nothing,

or only a plug, attached.
288 PIPE
Used on system isometrics to show the position(s) of any

change of Pipe reference.
289 MATL
Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the

specification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see the
SPECBREAK command). The names of the old and new
specifications are automatically included. (See also Atext
232.)
290 INSUL

specifications are automatically included.
291 TRACE

292 PAINT

298 TEE ELBOW
Message pointing to elbows that have an offline leg
337 D BEND RADIUS
Shows radius of pulled bend in multiples of the pipe

diameter
338 BEND RADIUS
Shows radius of pulled bend in current distance units (mm

or inch)
349 PP
Used as a heading for personnel protection insulation.
350 REDUCING
ELBOW
Message pointing to reducing elbows. Note that this text is

also used on the Material List.
454 CONNECTION
ORIENTATION
Shows the orientation of a skewed fabricated tee which has

nothing connected.
477 PER 10 FT
Message showing imperial fall accuracy.
4:4
12.0

Alternative Texts
478 PER 100 FT
Message showing imperial fall accuracy.
451 TAPPING
COORDINATES
Shows coordinates of tapping points for offline legs on userdefined multiway PCOMs
Note: Atext 243 produces the flat side message for reducers in orthogonal piping and Atext
283 is used for reducers in non-orthogonal piping.
ISODRAFT indicates the flat side of an eccentric reducer by default only when the
reducer is skewed. By using Atexts 243 and 283, you may have the flat side
indicated, or not, for skewed-only or all reducers.
460
BEAM $?
461
COLUMN $?
462
? $BUILDING CL
463
CL EQUIPMENT $?
464
CL PIPELINE $?
465
? $FLOOR LEVEL
466
? $WALL
467
GRID LINE $?
468
Text for reference dimensions. On the plot, $ is replaced by a new line, and ? is replaced
by the name of the element or one of its parents.
4.3
Title Block Area

250 DATE
The actual date is appended automatically in the required

format (see DATE).
This Atext also uses Atexts 258 to 269, inclusive, if the date
format is set to UK.
251 PROJECT NO
Used if the project number is to be plotted (see

PROJECTNUMBER)
252 BATCH REF
The PDMS zone name is appended automatically
253 PIPING SPEC
The value of the attribute SPEC from the element PIPE is

appended automatically
254 ISS
The value of the attribute REV (i.e. the revision level) from
the element PIPE is appended automatically
255 DRG
Used only when a pipe is split over multiple drawing sheets.

This Atext is used in conjunction with Atext 256 (in the
format DRG 1 OF 2) or with Atext 276 (in the format CONT.
FROM DRG 1).
4:5
12.0

Alternative Texts
4.4
256 OF
Used in conjunction with Atext 255
257 SPL
Denotes a SPOOL drawing. Sequential numbering, starting

at 1 for each pipe, is appended automatically.
258 JAN
259 FEB
260 MAR
261 APR
262 MAY
263 JUN
264 JUL
265 AUG
266 SEP
267 OCT
268 NOV
269 DEC
258 JAN to 269 DEC All used in conjunction with Atext

250 (for UK date formats)
270 THERMAL
INSULATION SPEC
The value of the attribute ISPE of the element PIPE is

271 TRACING SPEC
The value of the attribute TSPE of the element PIPE is

272 PAINTING SPEC
The value of the attribute PTSP of the element PIPE is

Plotted Material List

300 FABRICATION
MATERIALS
The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set to

TRUE and for pipe selected from a specification with a
?SHOP set to TRUE
310 ERECTION
MATERIALS
The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set to

FALSE and for pipe selected from a specification with no
?SHOP or with a ?SHOP set to FALSE
301 PT
The part number pointer, used in conjunction with Atext 302
302 NO
303 COMPONENT
DESCRIPTION
The sub-heading for the item description column
304 N.S.
Denotes nominal size (bore) of a pipe or component
305 ITEM CODE
The sub-heading for the item code column
306 QTY
Denotes quantity
307 PIPE
The sub-heading under which pipe is listed
308 FITTINGS
The sub-heading under which pipe fittings (elbows, tees

etc.) are listed
4:6
12.0

Alternative Texts
309 FLANGES
The sub-heading under which flanges are listed
311 GASKETS
The sub-heading under which gaskets are listed
312 BOLTS
The sub-heading under which bolts are listed
313 VALVES / IN-LINE

ITEMS
The sub-heading under which valves and in-line items are

listed
314 INSTRUMENTS
The sub-heading under which instruments are listed
315 SUPPORTS
The sub-heading under which supports are listed
339 MISCELLANEOUS
COMPONENTS
The sub-heading under which additional items are listed
316 PIPE SPOOLS
The sub-heading under which spool numbers are listed
319 CUT PIPE

LENGTHS
The heading under which cut pipe lengths are listed
320 PIECE
The sub-heading to Atext 319 which identifies individual cut

pipe lengths. Used in conjunction with Atext 321.
321 NO
322 CUT
The sub-heading to Atext 319 which indicates the actual

lengths of the cut pipes listed. Used in conjunction with
Atext 323
323 LENGTH
324 REMARKS
The sub-heading to Atext 319 under which Atexts 326, 327,

or 328 will be listed if applicable
326 PLD BEND
Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a pulled

bend
327 LOOSE FLG
Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a loose

flange
328 FF WELD
Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a fitted

field weld
334 S
Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to the

item code when one end of a fixed length spool has a
special flange
335 WITH SPECIAL

RATING FLANGE(S)
(SEE ISO)
Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to the

description. Used in conjunction with Atext 334.
341 EQUIPMENT TRIM

MATERIALS
Used as a heading for material lists in equipment trim

isometrics
342 NOZZLE REF -
Used as a subheading for each group of components

related to a particular Nozzle in an equipment trim MTO list
343 CONTINUED
Indicates that the listing for a Nozzle in an equipment trim

isometric is continued from a previous drawing sheet
4:7
12.0

Alternative Texts
4.5
345 AND
Used to separate parts of an equipment trim MTO list

between connected Nozzles
346 GEARBOX
ORIENTATION
Used for all valves created with a P11 to show the

orientation of P11
347
This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the

bottom of the material list on the master drawing to show
that the information is continued on another sheet. If it is
defined, it will override the standard Atexts 209, 255 and
256.
348
This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the top

of the material list on an overflow drawing to show that the
information is continued on another sheet. If it is defined, it
will override the standard Atexts 276, 255 and 256.
350 REDUCING
ELBOW
The subheading under which reducing elbows are listed.

Note that this text is also used in the drawing area.
377 PLD TEE
The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or material

list for tube pieces including pulled tee.
378 SETON TEE
The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or material

list for tube pieces including set-on tee.
480 SPOOL
This Atext is used in headings to show the spool number.
481 NO SPOOL
This Atext is used in headings for components which are not

included in any spool.
Line Summary Area

The symbol identification texts that are used in the line summary area, along the bottom of
the isometric drawing, can be changed or made blank.
If one of these Atexts is changed, the corresponding symbol will still be drawn. If the Atext is
made blank, the corresponding symbol will not be drawn in the line summary area.
The following texts are all used as explanatory captions for the examples of drawing
symbols used on the isometrics.
400 TRACED PIPE

401 LAGGED PIPE
402 PIPE SUPPORT
403 COMPN JOINT
404 SCREWED JOINT
405 SOCKET WELD
406 FIELD WELD
407 SHOP WELD
411 SITE CONNECTION
The following Atexts also appear in the line summary area:
4:8
12.0

Alternative Texts
317 PIPE NS
Used in conjunction with Atext 318. The total centre line

length for each bore is calculated automatically and listed
against this caption.
318 CL LENGTH
Used, in conjunction with Atext 317, to summarise centre

line lengths
410 [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO
DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
A standard explanatory note

408
Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory text

in the line summary area. For example:
ATEXT 408 PULLED BEND RADIUS IS

3 x NOMINAL PIPE BORE
409
Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory text

in the line summary area. For example:
ATEXT 409 ALL FLANGES 150 LB RATING

UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE
4.6
Printed Material List

The Atexts that are used in the printed material list only are:
4.7
329 M
Denotes metres
330 INS
Denotes inches
331 MM
Denotes millimetres
332 PAGE
A page number is appended automatically
333 PIPELINE REF
The pipe name is appended automatically
336 SYSTEM REF
Used to identify system isometrics. The system name is

appended automatically.
Weld Box Summary

The Atexts used in the weld box summary are as follows:
412 WELD |SHOP |WELD |WELDER |VISUAL

413 NO
|/FLD
|PROC
ID
|NDT |HARD S.R
|ACCEPT |NO
| NO |
|FAB.QA
|ACCEPT
Note: The vertical lines (|) shown in these examples are an essential part of the Atext and
must be input at the keyboard with the required text. The positioning of these lines
determines the output format.
4:9
12.0

Alternative Texts
4.8
Bend Table
The Atexts below are all titles of columns in the bend table:
4.9
470 PT NO
Part Number.
471 NB
Nominal Bore.
472 A
Dimension A.
473 B
Dimension B.
474 C
Dimension C.
475 ANGLE
The bend angle.
476 RADIUS
The bend radius.
Dynamic Detail Areas

479 DETAIL
This Atext is used to label items shown in separate detail plots, and also as headings for the
detail plots themselves.
4.10
Bolt Report
The Atexts below are used in the Bolt Report titles:
325 LENGTH
351 FAB
352 EREC
353 BOLT DESCRIPTION
455 POSITIONS WRT
4:10
12.0

Material Control File
5.1
Introduction
The Material Control File is an ASCII file which contains a record of all materials
incorporated into the isometric drawing, including piping components, tube, bolts, etc. It can
be used to pass details of material requirements to an external material control program.
A Material Control File is produced for each ISODRAW DETAIL command. The file
generated during a multiple plot run contains material records for all pipelines detailed by
that command.
5.2
Creating a Material Control File

To create a basic material control file, use the command:
MATControl
filename
where filename is the name of a file in the operating system directory. If a file of the given
name exists, new data will be added to the end of it. If filename does not exist, a new file is
created.
The format of the material control file is described in File Format.
You can create a more detailed material control file by using the EXTENDED command as
follows:
MATControl
filename EXTended
The extended material control file contains the information contained in the basic material
control file (see File Format), plus the following:
Part numbers (in word 8 of component records)
Item descriptions (as record -21)
File header with:

-5 record (originating program/version)
-3 record (title block information)
Note: Always delete files once the data has been transferred to the external material
control system, to avoid wasting disk space.
5.3
File Format
The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record of the quantity of each type
of component for each pipeline drawing.
5:1
12.0

Each pipeline record sequence begins with a general header, which includes references
and specifications applicable to the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown of
the individual items.
The codes used to identify the records are defined in the following sections.
The definitions may be understood more easily by referring to the example in Example of a
Material Control File Output, bearing in mind that only relevant records occur in any given
case.
5.3.1
Overall File Structure

The general file header record sequence may be summarised as follows:
Record
No.
-5
-3
Contents
Originating program(s)
Title block information
The overall record sequence for each pipeline may be summarised as shown below.
5:2
12.0

5.3.2
Material Control File Record Identification Numbers

The file section relating to each pipeline or drawing begins with a general header (records
coded -6 to -19) and continues with a separate record for each specific category of
information. A detailed breakdown of the information format for each of these categories is
given in the next subsection. The meanings of the various record type identification
numbers are as follows:
Record Contents
No.
-1
-3
-5
Overflow text record (used with all types of text records)

Titleblock information
Once per file
Originating program
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-19
-20
-21
-25
Pipeline reference (name or refno)

User-defined spool prefix identifier
Revision identifier (i.e. issue number)
-29
50
60
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Equipment trim reference

Number of spools plus drawing identification
Centreline length summary
Tube
Fittings (fabrication type)
Flanges
Gaskets
Bolts
Valves and other in-line components
Instruments
Supports
900
1000
Project identifier (i.e. project number)

Batch reference (Zone or Area name)
Piping specification reference
Nominal pressure rating (class)
Line type identifier
Date of data transfer
Insulation specification reference
Tracing specification reference
Painting specification reference
Pipeline operating temperature
Item Code
Item Description
System Isometric reference
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
The record formats are as follows (FORTRAN format):
5.3.3
Record no. >0:
14I5
Record no. <0:
I5, 3X, A13
Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record

The following tables show the information which is output for each type of record, listed in
the word order in which it is output. A word in this context means one specific item of
information.
5:3
12.0

The effect of these formats on the output will be most easily seen by studying the output
sample listing given in Example of a Material Control File Output.
Note: Each type of record has provision for up to 14 words, each word having an integer
field of length five. Only the number of words actually used for a particular type of
record is listed in the corresponding table.
Record Number 50:

Spool Count, Drawing Number and Number of Drawings
Word
Position
Number
Field Information
Comments
(inc. range of valid values
and purpose if applicable)
Record type number
Set to 50
Number of spools
on drawing
Set to appropriate number of

spools on drawing
Drawing number
Used when a pipeline splits onto

more than one drawing sheet
(e.g. `2' in 2 of 4)
Number of
drawings
Used when a pipeline splits onto

more than one drawing sheet
(e.g. `4' in 2 of 4)
Record Number 60:

Centreline Length Summary
Word
Position
Number
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 60
Dimensional units indicator

Units col. = bores
Tens col. = bolts
0 = Imperial bores
Metric lengths
1 = Imperial bores and lengths
2 = Metric bores and lengths
Nominal bore
Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
Centreline length
Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
Nominal bore
Centreline length
Nominal bore
Centreline length
Nominal bore
10
Centreline length
11
Nominal bore
12
Centreline length
13
Nominal bore
14
Centreline length
Note: Each type 60 record can accommodate up to six sizes of tube (i.e. up to six different
nominal bores). If a drawing sheet contains more than six bore sizes, more than one
type 60 record will be created. These will be written consecutively to the file.
The dimensional units specified by word 2 in record 60 are applicable to all
subsequent records up to the next set of header information; i.e. up to the -6
identifier for the next pipeline.
5:4
12.0

Record Number 100:

Tube
Word
Position
Number
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 100
Primary bore
Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity/length
Tube lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
not used
Part number
Record Number 200:

Fittings
Word
Position
Number
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 200
Primary bore
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity
Set to number of fitting types

required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
not used
Part number
Record Number 300:

Flanges
5:5
12.0

Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 300
Primary bore
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity
Set to number of flanges

required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
not used
Part number
Word
Position
Number
Record Number 400:

Gaskets
Word
Position
Number
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 400
Primary bore
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity
Set to number of gaskets

required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
not used
Part number
Record Number 500:

Bolts
5:6
12.0

Word
Position
Number
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 500
Bolt diameter
Diameters in mm or 1/16th inches
Not used
Not used
Quantity
Set to number of bolts required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
Bolt length
Bolt lengths in mm
Part number
Record Number 600:

Valves and In-line Items
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 600
Primary bore
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity
Set to number of items required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
Not used
Part number
Word
Position
Number
Record Number 700:

Instruments
5:7
12.0

Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 700
Primary bore
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity
Set to number of instruments

required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
Not used
Part number
Word
Position
Number
Record Number 800:

Supports and Hangers
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 800
Primary bore
Secondary bore
Third bore
(if required)
Quantity
Set to number of supports and/or

hangers required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
Not used
Part number
Word
Position
Number
Record Number 900:

Miscellaneous Component Record with Unit Quantity
5:8
12.0

Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 900
Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero
Component Bore or Bolt

Diameter
Not used
Not used
Quantity
Set to number of components

required
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
Bolt Length
In mm or zero
Part number
Word
Position
Number
Record Number 1000:

Miscellaneous Component Record with Length Quantity
Word
Position
Number
5.4
Field Information
Comments
Record type number
Set to 1000
Component Bore
Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero
Not used
Not used
Quantity
(Length)
In 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
Fab/Erec marker
1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
Not used
Part number
Example of a Material Control File Output

-6
-8
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
50
60
100
-20
100
-20
100
-20
200
-20
200
-20
WTZA601
1
RJK51->
M150
150
WELD
29/01/87
LAG1
2
1
0
96
96
0
PML40
64
0
PML40
16
0
PML80
96
64
REBW
96
0
ELBW
1
73
0
0
64
62
0
73
1
0
16
0
0
23
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
20
5:9
12.0

200
...
300
-20
...
400
-20
...
500
-20
...
600
-20
...
64
64
16
0
FMM150SW
64
0
JC150R2
12
0
BM3/4X76
16
76
64
VBFL
5:10
12.0

Error Messages
Error Messages
This appendix lists ISODRAFT error messages that may be output to the screen and
message file.
Messages generated by ISODRAFT itself have message numbers beginning with 33.
Messages generated by the ISODRAW module within ISODRAFT have message

numbers beginning with 35. In most cases these will arise only when the program limits
have been reached, and you should contact the AVEVA Customer Services Team.
Any other messages that may be output are not described here as they are not specific to
ISODRAFT.
Note: Many of the messages you will see when using ISODRAFT result from design or
cataloguing errors, not from errors in using ISODRAFT. For this reason a data
consistency check is strongly advised before ISODRAFT is used.
The error messages can include variables, presented in this appendix as follows:
integer
an integer
realno
a real (i.e. non-integer) number
name
an item name (general context)
name/refno
a name of an item (or refno if unnamed)
filename
a PDMS filename
text
an alphanumeric character string
(33:1)
Paper size A4 to A0 only allowed

See the SIZE command.
(33:2)
ISO 1,2,3,4 only allowed

See the ISO command.
(33:3)
AREA must be between 1 & 10

See the WASTAGE AREA command.
(33:110)
BAD RETURN FILE

The list of pipes successfully detailed by ISODRAW cannot be read.
(33:114)
VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 1 AND 25

The maximum number of lines permitted in the title block area is 25.
A:1
12.0

Error Messages
(33:116)
VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 201 AND 500

The Atext numbers of texts which can be changed by the ATEXT command
must be within the specified range. See Recommendations for Importing
DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation for more information on Atexts
(33:121)
PAPER LENGTH must be greater than ZERO

This is self-explanatory.
(33:123)
SPEC REF name gives material code ( text ) longer than max of integer
characters
The itemcode derived from the components name is longer than the width
allowed in the itemcode column in the material list (see the ITEMCODE
command).
(33:124)
VALUE between 1 & 20 only

The identifying number allocated in a KEYS command must be within the
specified range.
(33:147)
INST name/refno is not named

Itemcodes for instruments are currently defined as PDMS names (probably
by default) and an instrument has been found without a name.
(33:149)
SYSTEM ERROR
Unable to scan pipe network
Check data consistency report and flow directions at branch
connections.
There is a design inconsistency which prevents ISODRAFT from detailing
the specified pipeline. Run a data consistency check to find probable
sources of error. In some cases this error may be produced by a
configuration which is legal but which cannot currently be scanned by
ISODRAFT. This problem can usually be resolved by splitting the pipe into
more branches.
(33:150)
BAD NAME/REF
A name or reference specified for detailing cannot be accessed.
(33:151)
Too many items in DETAIL list

The Detail list cannot contain more than 100 items.
(33:152)
Cant remove NAME/REF

A name or reference specified in a Remove list cannot be accessed. In
particular, note that World must not occur in a Remove list.
(33:153)
Too many items in REMOVE list

The Remove list cannot contain more than 100 items.
(33:155)
The DETAIL list is empty

Either there are no items in the Add list or the items specified in the Remove
list have completely cancelled out those specified in the Add list, leaving
nothing to be detailed.
A:2
12.0

Error Messages
(33:156)
PLOT FILE NAME/PREFIX or TERM have not been specified

The output destination (terminal or named file) must be specified before
ISODRAFT can detail anything.
(33:157)
NO PIPES HAVE BEEN PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY

ISODRAFT has failed to detail any pipes. The reasons may be suggested by
other error messages generated during the detailing processes
(33:158)
MORE THAN 100 BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno

ISODRAFT cannot cope with more than 100 branches in one pipeline.
(33:159)
NO BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno

This is self-explanatory.
(33:160)
name/refno will not be detailed

The specified Pipe or Branch cannot be detailed by ISODRAFT. The reason
may be found in another message or a data consistency report.
(33:162)
HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same component
but head & tail positions are not close enough to that component
There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected to
the component. This should not normally occur.
(33:163)
HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same component
and head & tail positions are the same
There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected to
the component. This should not normally occur.
(33:164
Component name/refno refers to a BRANCH ( name/refno ) which does

not refer back to it
Tee points
to branch
Branch head/tail
points elsewhere
There is an inconsistency between the connection attribute of the

component and the branch to which it refers. For example:
(33:165)
The HEAD of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions

are not the same
(33:166)
The TAIL of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are

not the same
There is an inconsistency between the HPOS or TPOS attribute of the
branch and the p-point of the component to which it should be attached.
(33:167)
ELEMENT name/refno is not a piping component

An element found while detailing a pipe is not of an appropriate type.
A:3
12.0

Error Messages
(33:168)
Cannot find FLANGE to match PPOINT integer of name/refno

The connection reference on the given p-point needs to be accessed to
determine the bolting requirements. This message means either that the
connection reference is unset or invalid, or that a component of type FLAN
cannot be found on that connection
(33:169)
Cannot find end of WAFER at name/refno

The other end of the wafer fitting at the specified location cannot be found.
Connection types commencing with W must be used in pairs.
(33:170)
BOLTING BRANCH Table full
(33:171)
BOLTING MULTIWAY COMPONENT Table full

These tables keep account of those items which have already been
accessed for bolting requirements. The limits are 100 items in the Branch
Table and 200 items in the Multiway Component Table.
(33:172)
No non-standard BOLT lengths for SBOLT name/refno

LENGTH is realno
(33:173)
No long enough non-standard BOLT lengths for name/refno

See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing
Requirements.
(33:174)
No SPCOM for name/refno

The item specified has no component specification from which bolting
requirements (the BLTREF attribute) can be derived. See AVEVA PDMS
ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.
(33:175)
No BOLTS for SPCOM name/refno

The SPCOM for the specified item does not have its BLTREF attribute set
and so its bolting requirements cannot be determined. See AVEVA PDMS
ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements
(33:176)
Invalid SPCOM name/refno for component, or tube connected to, name/

refno
A component, or the implied tube connected directly to it, does not have a
valid specification reference (SPRE or LSTU). Check the data consistency
report.
(33:177)
Cannot get DETAIL info. on SPCOM name/refno
(33:178)
Cannot get MATXT info. on SPCOM name/refno

These indicate possible cataloguing errors. The SPCOMs specified do not
have the appropriate attributes set for the data needed by ISODRAFT. See
AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing
Requirements.
(33:179)
Reference datum name/refno is unnamed

No text will be shown for the reference dimension on the isometric.
A:4
12.0

Error Messages
(33:180)
PWAST attribute from SPCOM name/refno out of range 0.00 - 100.0

The wastage allowance attribute must be set to a percentage figure between
0 and 100%. See the WASTAGE AREA command.
(33:181)
BOLT TABLE FULL

The number of different bolts which can be processed in a single pipe is
limited to 1000.
(33:182)
name/refno connected to name/refno but not the other way round
(33:183)
name/refno not close enough to name/refno
(33:184)
ARRIVE or LEAVE PPOINT greater than 4

ISODRAFT can only deal with 4-way components whose arrive or leave
ppoints are not greater than 4.
(33:185)
Multi-way component name/refno is not connected where expected
(33:187)
Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH but positions are
not the same.
(33:188)
Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH and positions are
the same.
(33:189)
One leg of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are

not the same.
Errors (33:182) to (33:189) all indicate possible errors in the DESIGN
databases. Check the data consistency report and correct errors using a
design module.
(33:190)
CANNOT OPEN OPTIONS WORK FILE : ERROR integer
(33:191)
CANNOT OPEN MESSAGE FILE : ERROR integer
(33:192)
OPTIONS STATE IS LOST

OPTIONS RESTORED TO DEFAULTS
These indicate system filing errors, possibly due to a disc overflow. In most
cases further explanatory messages will be output.
(33:193)
MESSAGE FILE NOT SET

A file for output messages must be specified before ISODRAFT can begin
any detailing. See the MESSAGEFILENAME command.
(33:195)
BRANCH name/refno is not in the network

A pipe must have all its branches connected to each other in order to be
detailed. The branch specified does not appear to be connected in this way.
(33:196)
name/refno has already been detailed

The Pipe or Branch specified has its Detail Flag set to TRUE. It may be
detailed by using the MARK IGNORE ON option, or by resetting the DETA
attribute to FALSE in a design module.
A:5
12.0

Error Messages
(33:197)
SYSTEM WARNING - MATERIAL NAME TABLE OVERFLOW - MAX

integer NAMES
This could occur on isometrics which incorporate a very large number of
different items. It could result in items with the same itemcodes, but with
different suffixes, being treated as different items.
(33:198)
ATTACHMENT POINT name/refno HAS NO STEXT

An ATTA being used as a comment (ATTY set to CCCC or CCNN) has no
text stored in its STEXT attribute.
(33:199)
ERROR IN DETERMINING BOLTING FOR name/refno

See Bolting for information on the cataloguing requirements for bolts.
(33:200)
Unable to access PIPE SPEC name/refno

A pipe specification referenced by a pipe specified in a detailing command is
not accessible in the current MDB.
(33:203)
BAD CONNECTION TO name/refno

This suggests a possible error in the HREF or TREF of a branch. Check the
data consistency report and rectify errors using a design module.
(33:252)
Unable to locate text text within itemcode

The locating text specified in a BOLT LENGTH ITEM INSERT AT text
command (see the BOLTING command) cannot be found in the itemcode for
a bolt. ISODRAFT will use the default format for this bolt in the itemcode list
and outputs this message for information only.
(33:267)
name/refno - Illegal or Inaccessible Reference Datum point

The reference dimension is pointing to an incorrect or non-existent element.
(33:268)
Reference datum name/refno - Orientation has been modified to

prevent Doubleback Dimension error
The reference dimension requested for a Structure is parallel to the
centreline. A reasonable orientation has been chosen instead.
(33:269)
Dimension omitted for Reference datum name/refno - Doubleback

Dimension
The reference dimension requested for a Piping component or Section is
parallel to the centreline.
(33:299)
Illegal scale factor found for line flow arrow - default scale 8 used
The scale factor for in-line flow arrows must be in the range 5 to 15 inclusive.
(33:331)
Illegal HREF connection on BRAN name/refno
(33:332)
Illegal TREF connection on BRAN name/refno

The Head or Tail Reference of the Branch being detailed is invalid. It may
have been deleted, or it may be in a DB which is not current in the MDB.
A:6
12.0

Error Messages
(33:338)
User defined symbol library has not been specified

You have tried to define a symbol without first specifying a symbol library file
in which to store the definition. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide,
Chapter 11, Symbol Keys.
(33:340)
Limit of integer user defined symbols exceeded
(33:341)
Symbol key text rejected

You have tried to define more symbols than the current maximum limit of
300. The specified symbol will not be added to the symbol library. See
AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys.
(33:343)
Error in updating symbol library

An existing symbol file cannot be overwritten. Check that you have sufficient
access rights.
(33:345)
Unable to create new symbol library text

A new symbol file cannot be created. Check that you have sufficient access
rights.
(33:346)
Error reading symbol library text

An existing symbol file cannot be read. Check that you have sufficient
access rights.
(33:347)
Unable to locate key text in symbol library

The specified SKEY cannot be found in the current symbol library.
(33:348)
Row number integer is outside the range 1-999
(33:349)
Table number integer is outside the range 1-999

You have exceeded the limits of table definition for user-positioned text. See
the ATEXT command.
(33:350)
Limit of integer user positional text records exceeded

You have tried to position more than the current maximum limit of 100 text
fields. See the ATEXT command.
(33:351)
Character size integer exceeds maximum limit of 99

You have specified a character height greater than the maximum limit of
99mm. See the ATEXT command.
(33:361)
Option number integer is outside the allowed range 1-140

Debug options must lie within the range 1-140.
(33:363)
Balloon size integer is outside the allowed range 1-5

You have specified an instrument balloon size outside the permitted range of
1-5 character widths.
(33:365)
The no of components :- integer is outside the allowed range 1-50

You may only turn off fallskew boxes for lengths of pipeline which contain no
more than 50 components. See the FALLSKEWS command.
A:7
12.0

Error Messages
(33:368)
SPOOLNumbers must be positioned with table parameters

User-positioned text for spool numbers must include X and Y offsets within
its definition to form a tabular layout. See the POSITION command.
(33:386)
Bend radius outside allowable range 0 to 50 D

The permitted range for standard bend radii is 0-50 pipe diameters.
(33:387)
Illegal value for bend radius

You can not specify a standard bend radius of less than 1mm.
(33:399)
Maximum of 20 nested PCOM tappings exceeded

Tapping legs off PCOMs or SHUs can themselves contain PCOMs or SHUs
with tapping legs, up to a maximum limit of 20 levels of nesting.
(33:407)
Cannot detail at branch level for system iso

Detailing at Branch level is restricted to single pipe isometrics. System
isometrics must include complete pipes.
(33:408)
Plottingscale limits (50-100%) exceeded - reset to 100

Note: The plotting scale is limited to a reduction to a minimum of half size.
Magnification is not permitted. The scaling factor has been reset
automatically to 100%.
Note: The following error messages are generated during the operation of
ISODRAW. Those numbered (35:10xx) relate to the ISODAT
program and those numbered (35:20xx) relate to the ISOPLOT
program.
Note: Refer to the AVEVA PDMS Customer Support Department for advice
if you have unexplained errors at this stage of ISODRAFTs
operations.
(35:1001)
OVER 200 ALTERNATIVE TEXT RECS FOLLOWING DATA IGNORED
(35:1002)
MORE THAN 200 TEXT RECORDS - DEFAULT TABLE USED

The maximum number of non-standard text phrases which may be used at
one time is 200 (see the ATEXT command).
(35:1004)
FITTING NOT FOUND - DEFAULT SHAPE USED

A specified SKEY is not recognised. The relevant component will be
indicated on the isometric drawing by the default rectangle symbol (see
AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys).
(35:1006)
OVERFLOW IN DATA - PIPELINE REJECTED
to
(message number depends on reason for overflow)
(35:1014)
This is a fatal error; the isometric will not be plotted.
(35:1015)
INVALID ITEM/DESCRIPTION POINTER
A:8
12.0

Error Messages
(35:1016)
ITEM CODE WIDTH ERROR - APPENDED TEXT LOST

An itemcode contains more characters than the specified column width in
the material list (see the ITEMCODE command).
(35:1017)
OVERFLOW IN DATA - CHECK DIMENSIONS
(35:1018)
NO FITTING DETAILS EXIST FOR FITTING CODE
(35:1019)
FITTINGS OVERLAP WHICH CANNOT BE CUT BACK
(35:1020)
INSUFFICIENT LENGTH ON OVERLAPPING FITTINGS TO ALLOW

CUTBACK
(35:1021)
RUN ABORTED
THE WIDTH OR HEIGHT (EXCLUDING BORDERS, MATERIAL LIST
ETC) IS LESS THAN 50MM. THIS IS NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR THE
ISOMETRIC
The layout specified for the drawing sheet does not leave enough room for
the isometric drawing itself. The drawing will not therefore be plotted. See
the FILE, SIZE and STACKINGARRANGEMENT commands.
(35:1022)
THE MATERIAL CODE IS TOO WIDE AND HAS BEEN CHANGED FROM
... TO ...
(35:1023)
THE TOTAL NUMBER OF ALLOWED CHARACTERS (3,900) IN FREE

MESSAGES HAS BEEN EXCEEDED
(35:1024)
THE NUMBER OF FREE MESSAGES (50) HAS BEEN EXCEEDED
(35:1025)
THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN MESSAGE EXCEED (300)

THE (LAST) MESSAGE BEGAN WITH ...
(35:1084)
Warning - Support shape not found
(35:1100)
Error - Unable to position ref.dimension using coordinates given

- Ref dimension record co-ords are val val val
- Ref dimension not shown on drawing
(35:1105)
Warning - Reference Dimension key not found - Default line shown

An invalid or blank SKEY has been used for a reference dimension. See
AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 5, Design Requirements.
(35:2001)
DRAWING DELETED
(35:2003)
WELD NUMBERS HAVE CAUSED DATA OVERFLOW
(35:2004)
INPUT DATA OVERFLOW
(35:2005)
WARNING TEE OFF TEE >4 DEEP
(35:2007)
TEE IN SKEW
(35:2008)
DATA FAULT SKEW
(35:2009)
SKEW WITH NO CONTENTS
(35:2010)
FITTING WITH OFFSET NOT IN LINE WITH PIPE
A:9
12.0

Error Messages
(35:2011)
ANGLE FAIL
(35:2012)
DATA FAULT
(35:2013)
UP DOWN
(35:2014)
EAST WEST
(35:2015)
NORTH SOUTH
(35:2016)
DATA OVERFLOW, DRAWING REJECTED
(35:2017)
MESSAGE FAIL
(35:2018)
SHAPE FAIL
(35:2020)
TOO MANY COORDINATES IN FITTINGS
(35:2021)
TOO MANY FITTINGS
(35:2023)
WARNING, PAPER SIZE >A0 OR AD - THIS MAY PRODUCE

UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS
ISODRAFT does not recognise standard paper sizes larger than A0 or E.
Larger sheet sizes can be specified by using the HEIGHT and WIDTH
options. See the SIZE command.
(35:2024)
REJECTED, TOO MUCH DATA, TRY SMALLER SPLIT
(35:2025)
... CHECK
(35:2026)
... FAIL
(35:2027)
... PLOTTED
(35:2028)
... NOT PLOTTED
(35:2029)
... DRG.
These are used in progress summaries in the message file.
(35:2030)
WARNING PLOTFILE NUMBER HAS REACHED 999

NEXT PLOTFILE WILL OVERWRITE ...001
PLOT file names are suffixed with a three-digit number to avoid ambiguity.
This limits the number of different PLOT files with the same basic file name
to 999. See the FILE command.
(35:2031)
THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE ...
(35:2035)
READY FOR NEXT DRAWING. HIT RETURN TO GO

This message appears on screen between plots when more than one
drawing is to be output to a graphics terminal.
(35:2036)
THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS WERE SENT TO THE TERMINAL
(35:2037)
ERROR OPENING UNDERLAY PLOTFILE
(35:2038)
ERROR READING PLOTFILE
(35:2039)
PLOTFILE INCOMPATIBLE PAPER SIZE
A:10
12.0

Error Messages
(35:2040)
BAD PLOT CODE - PLOTFILE PROBABLY CORRUPT
(35:2041)
THE SCHEMA PLOTFILE OPTION HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF
(35:2042)
SPECIFIED PLOTFILE LENGTH ...
(35:2043)
... IS LESS THAN DRAWING LENGTH
(35:2044)
PLOTFILE LENGTH HAS BEEN INCREASED TO ...
A:11
12.0

Error Messages
A:12
12.0

Examples of Isometric Plots

3
0
4
O
T
.
N
N
O
C
9
2
2
9
2
2
1
1
7
0
4
O
T
.
N
N
O
C
0
1
2
N
/
2
P
M
U
P
D
0
E
5
E 89
F7 31
-9 5+
N4 1
O
L
CW SE
0
1
2
N
/22 1
811 5
060 +
146
L
CWS E
9
8
5
4 04
S
N
"
6
9
2
2
4
1
B
3
1
G 1
1
9
F
4
1
B
3
1
G
9
F
L0
T5
A1
MA
9
2
2
9
2
6
1
3
8
4
1
0
1
2 602
O
T
.
N
N
O
C
S
N
"
6
x
4 8
0
5
9
1
+
7 L
E
2
N
/
1
P
M
U
P
0
D
5
E
E 789
F 931
- 85+
N 11
L
O
C WSE
260 2
0
0
6
1
4
9
4
1
1
2
1
89 0
72 4
05 +
44
L
WS E
8
7
1
6
5
3
6
5
3
6
6
1
S
N
"
8
x
38
S
N
"
6
x
48
0
5
9
1
+
7 L
E
6
0
2
2
8
F
7
0
4
2
9
4
6
2
1
G
2
1
G
8
F
9
2
2
704
SN "8
1 ] 4[
5
1
B
S
2 "N
6
2
6 9
1 2
8
7
1
S
] N
1 "
[ 8
5
2
6
6
1
2
1
690
424
15+
54
L
WSE
2
1
G
8
F
8
9
9
1
L
U
J
7
2
:
E
T
A
D
m
e
t
s
y
S
e
t
a
s
n
e
d
n
o
C
:
F
E
R
H
C
T
A
B
1
G F
R O
D
1
A
1
A
:
C
E
P
S
G
N
I
P
I
P
k
r
o
w
t
e
N
_
t
e
l
t
u
O
D
EE
CP
AI
RP
T
D
EE
GP
GI
AP
L
T
R
O
EP
PP
IU
PS
N
O
I
ET
TC
IE
SN
N
O
C
NT
PN
MI
OO
CJ
D
ET
WN
EI
RO
CJ
S
T
ED
KL
CE
OW
S
D
LD
EL
IE
FW
PD
OL
HE
SW
2
]
3
[
2
]
2
[
0
0
1
2
O
N
L
O
O
P
S
E
P
I
P
S
E
T
O
N
E
D
S
E
T
O
N
E
D
]
11
[
N
YTQ-
|
S
L
A
I
R
E
T
A
M
N
O
I
T
A
C
I
R
B
A
F
| -
EDOCMETI) .S SN .I N( -
MM
22
..
11
1
TO PN -
3 2
00
05
21
aa
PP
5
1
X
0
0 0 00
0 0 00 5
1
2 2 22
a A ca a
T T KE E
0 0
0 5
2 1
w w
F F
0
5
1
c
B
0
5
1
g
B
86
86
xx
8 8 88 6
8 6
B
L
5
I
P
A
N
O
I
T
P
I
R
C
S
E
D
T
N
E
N
O
P
M
O
C
1 2 21 8
B
P
W
4
3
2
A
B
L
5
I
P
A
00
11
..
66
33
BB
II
SS
NN
AA
00
44
HH
CC
SS
EE
E- PP
P- II
I- PP
P-
S
G
N
I
T
T
I
F
12
Figure B:1.
M
T
S
A
W
B
9
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
E
E
T
B
P
W
4
3
2
A
M
T
S
A
W
B
9
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
E
E
T
BB
PP
WW
-44
33
22
AA
MM
TT
SS
AA
WW
BB
99
..
66
11
BB
II
SS
NN
AA
GR
NL
O
LW
O
PB
AL
CE
B
P
W
4
3
2
A
M
T
S
A
W
B
9
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
R
L
W
O
B
L
E
3 4 56 7
5
0
1
A
M
T
S
A
F
R
.
0
5
1
#
5
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
N
W
S -E
E -G
G -N
N -A
A -L
L -F
F -
5
0
1
A
M
T
S
A
F
R
.
0
5
1
#
5
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
N
W
E
G
N
A
L
F
8 9
M
T
S
A
W
B
0
1
.
6
1
B
0
1
EDOCME -T -I -)
.S
SN
.I
N(
M
T
S
A
0
5
1
#
SM- I
E- S
T- N
I- A
E- K
N- H
I- C
L-- G
N- N
I- I
- W
/- S
S- E
E- V
V- L
L- A
A- V
V-
YTQ-
0
5
1
#
W
B
0
1
.
6
1
B
B
C
W
6
1
2
A
I
S
N
A
E
T
A
G
E
V
L
A
V
1
1
B
C
W
6
1
2
A
|
S
L
A
I
R
E
T
A
M
N
O
I
T
C
E
R
E
| -
N
O
I
T
P
I
R
C
S
E
D
T
N
E
N
O
P
M
O
C
T OP N-
3 2
6 8
1
0 0
0 5
2 1
c c
G G
0 0
0 0
1 1
R T
B B
B B
S S
9
5
A
G
8 6
6 6
1 1
/ /
3 3
1 1
B
S
A
&
S
S
0
5
1
#
5
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
M
M
5
.
1
F
R
S- T
T- E
E- K
K- S
S- A
A- G
G-
B
S
A
&
S
S
0
5
1
#
5
.
6
1
B
I
S
N
A
M
M
5
.
1
F
R
T
E
K
S
A
G
2 3
1 1
O
N
T
S
I
L
S
T
R
A
P
H
2
/
7
B
3
9
1
A
M
T
S
A
S
T
U
N
2
W
C
D
U
T
S
S T -0
L -0
O -1
B -
H
2
/
7
B
3
9
1
A
M
T
S
A
S
T
U
N
2
W
C
D
U
T
S
0
0
1
4 5
1 1
L
E
K
C
I
N
%
9
F
R
.
0
5
1
#
0
S- 1
M- .
E- 6
T- 1
I- B
E- I
N- S
I- N
L- A
-N- E
I- T
- A
/- G
S- E L
E- V E
V- L E
L- A T
A- V S
V-
0
6 .
7
1
]
4
[
S - ]
L - 3
O - [
O P - ]
S - 2
- [
E P - ]
I - 1
P - [
6
1
0
8 .
4
)
S
N
I
(
S
N
E
P
I
P
H
T
G
N
E
L
L
C
Combined Fabrication & Erection Isometric with Materials List
B:1
12.0
Figure B:2.
B:2
[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO

1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
22
21
00
06
[2]
2062
EL +1950
14
94
[1]
8"NS
178
8x6"NS 8x8"NS
16
00
2
166
[3]
6"NS
229
407 229
229
49
2
6
35
35
178
166
8x6"NS
14
2062
MATL
A150
[4]
8"NS
292
29
16
6" N
58
Outlet_Network
DATE: 27 JUL 1998

BATCH REF: Condensate System
PIPING SPEC: A1A
SHOPFIELD SOCKETSCREWED
COMPN SITE
PIPE
LAGGEDTRACED
WELDWELD WELD JOINT JOINT CONNECTION
SUPPORTPIPE
PIPE
EL +1950
83
404
407
DRG
1 OF 1
407 229
22
403

Fabrication-Only Isometric
12.0
[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO

1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
21
00
06
22
[2]
2062
15
16
12
EL +1950
CONN. TO
CON-FEED-PUMP-1/N2
W 1897
S 1538
EL +1950
9
B:3
[3]
11
[1]
8"NS
22
229
2
166
16
00
49
2
94
14
10
229
27
8x6"NS
178
W 5146
S 4529
EL +4012
6
35
8x6"NS
8x8"NS
407
6"NS
356
14
178
26
13
W 4078
S 4529
EL +4012
166
17
20
2062
28
29
31
CONN. TO
C-108/N1
W 4612
S 6012
EL +5120
29
MATL
A150
292
30
16
CONN. TO
CON-FEED-PUMP-2/N2
W 497
S 1538
25
EL +1950
6"N
S
58
9
21
24
22
23
Outlet_Network
DATE: 27 JUL 1998

BATCH REF: Condensate System
PIPING SPEC: A1A
SHOPFIELD SOCKETSCREWED
COMPN SITE
PIPE
LAGGEDTRACED
WELDWELD WELD JOINT JOINT CONNECTION
SUPPORTPIPE
PIPE
14
83
EL +1950
19
18
[4]
8"NS
404
Figure B:3.
407
229
DRG
1 OF 1
407
229
403

Erection-Only Isometric
12.0

B:4
12.0

Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module

PDMS ISODRAFT has a facility to transfer material information to the COMPIPE module of
the John Brown Systems COMDACE system. This is achieved by the output of two files
containing COMPIPE Linelist and MTO data. You can control the production and content of
these files. COMPIPE component Short Codes are accessed direct from the PDMS catalog
databases, providing pointers into the COMPIPE piping specification.
C.1
Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT

The COMPIPE interface is switched on by specifying a single file prefix, used to define the
Linelist and MTO files. ISODRAFT will create files using this prefix with suffixes of .LINE and
.MTO, together with a three digit number of the form 001, taking the next file in sequence in
the directory. To set the file prefix enter the command:
COMPIPEFile
/<filename>.
To switch off this facility, enter the command COMPIPEFile OFF.

For example, the command COMPIPEFile /comp would produce Linelist files of the form
comp.LINE001, comp.LINE002, etc. and MTO files of the form comp.MTO001,
comp.MTO002, etc.
C.2
Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files

The options that affect the contents of the COMPIPE files generated by ISODRAFT are:
COMPIPE MTO DRWG
Lists material by individual isometric drawing

sheet.
COMPIPE MTO PIPE
Lists material by complete pipeline.
COMPIPE ITEMcodes User
Instructs COMPIPE to use user itemcodes.
COMPIPE ITEMcodes Client
Instructs COMPIPE to use client temcodes.
COMPIPE DESCriptions Short
Instructs COMPIPE to use short descriptions.
COMPIPE DESCriptions Long
Instructs COMPIPE to use long descriptions.
COMPIPE SUPPorts ON
Includes supports from the MTO file.
COMPIPE SUPPorts OFF
Excludes supports from the MTO file.
C:1
12.0

These may be chained. The default condition is COMPIPE MTO DRWG ITEMcodes User
DESCriptions Short SUPPorts ON. Note that a materiallist overflow option other than
MATEriallist DUMMy (the default condition) must be used with COMPIPE MTO DRWG.
C.3
Pipe Attributes
Four text attributes of pipe are used by the COMPIPE interface. These are:
CARE COMPIPE
area up to 4 characters, mandatory
DESCRIPTION
Pipeline description up to 80 characters, optional
CDRG COMPIPE
drawing number up to 24 characters, optional
CNUM COMPIPE
line number up to 14 characters, optional
The CNUM attribute is available so that a line number may be stored for COMPIPE
purposes that differs from the PDMS pipe NAME. If CNUM is blank or unset, the first 14
characters of the NAME will be used. Note that the pipeline DESCRIPTION is output in the
Linelist file. This should not be confused with the option for COMPIPE DESCRIPTIONS,
which is an instruction in the MTO file to COMPIPE on how to output component
descriptions in its reports.
C.4
Detail Text Attributes

Two attributes of detail texts (ADTEX - HDTEX) are used by the COMIPE interface. These
are:
SCOD
Short Code up to 3 characters, mandatory
CSPC COMPIPE
Specification up to 6 characters, optional
All components, tube and bolts must have a short code, unless they are to be treated in
COMPIPE as out-of-spec items. In this case they may only be handled as additional items
on the material list. If any other component is found to have no short code, no COMPIPE
files will be generated for the whole pipeline.
For standard assemblies, the short code of SAN must be used. Standard assemblies are
listed in the MTO file with their itemcodes (truncated to 8 characters) as their standard
assembly numbers.
The COMPIPE Specification attribute allows a COMPIPE Specification name to be used
that differs from the PDMS Pipe Specification name. If CSPC is blank or unset, the PDMS
Pipe Specification of the component will be used (truncated to 6 characters).
C.5
Limitations
C.5.1
Itemcodes containing the / character

The slash (/) character is used by default as a delimiter within the Intermediate Data File
(transfer file) between itemcodes, short codes and COMPIPE Spec names. Therefore, if
itemcodes are to contain slash characters (e.g. in the case of ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG
C:2
12.0

where the specification name is included), an alternative delimiter must be set as ATEXT
299. Note that it is the itemcode after SPEC name and trailing delimiter characters have
been removed that is important. Since the slash character is often used within PDMS
names, ISODRAFT will automatically set Atext 299 to the tilde (~) character when
COMPIPEFILE is set. This can then be changed if required, e.g. use ATExt 299 :.
C.5.2
Instruments and Supports Tag Names

Instrument and support names will be output in the MTO files only if the options
INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used. Instrument and support itemcodes
will never be output in the MTO files.
C.5.3
Material per Isometric Sheet

In order to obtain MTO per isometric drawing, a material list overflow option that may insert
extra sheet numbers should not be used. Instead, use one of:
MATEriallist OVER
MATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix
MATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix SINGle
If the default option MATEriallist DUMMy is used, a warning occurs in the message file. It
states Compipe material accumulation per drawing conflicts with material list generated on
isometric. Compipe materials accumulated per pipeline. Any isometrics splitting onto more
than one sheet will be accompanied by MTO files listing all materials for the pipeline as if on
a single sheet.
C.5.4
Specification Breaks
The output of Alternative Spec records and the subsequent addition of the Y prefix to each
Short Code from the new specification is affected by the SPECBreak option. If SPECBreak
BRANch is used, e.g. to suppress specbreaks for instruments from a special instruments
specification on the isometric, then these items will be output in the MTO file as if from the
standard specification.
C.5.5
System and Spool Isometrics

COMPIPE files will not be produced for system isometrics or spool isometrics.
C.5.6
Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON

These will fail to update the database when COMPIPEFile is used in conjunction with a
CNUM. The actual pipe NAME must be used in order to allow these database updates.
C:3
12.0

C.6
Format of COMPIPE Linelist File

The Linelist file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of three records
for each pipeline in the batch:
Batch Header
Line List Header
for each pipeline
Delivery Point Details
for each pipeline
Line Description
for each pipeline
In the following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is a
record terminator.The Batch Header record is defined thus:
BATCH888821JAN99LINEPROJNUMB
where:
BATCH
is a fixed record identifier
8888
is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number
21JAN99
is the run date when the pipe was detailed
LINE
is a fixed identifier for a Linelist file
PROJNUMB
is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)
The Line List Header record is defined thus:
A:AREA:LINENUMBER:PIPE SPEC:NO OF SHEETS:MAIN SIZE::PAINT

SPEC:INSU SPEC::*
where
AREA
is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters)
LINENUMBER
is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14

characters)
PIPE SPEC
is from the pipe PSPEC (truncated to 6 characters)
NO OF SHEETS
is the number of isometric sheets for the pipeline, e.g. 02
MAIN SIZE
is the largest nominal size in the pipe, of the form 1.1/2, 6,

etc. for imperial, and 25, 80, etc. for metric
PAINT SPEC
is from the paint specification (truncated to 6 characters)
INSU SPEC
is from the insulation specification (truncated to 6

characters)
The Delivery Point Details record is defined thus:
D::::::*
C:4
12.0

This is a dummy record, normally used for delivery point and date information during manual
input. Such information is not available from ISODRAFT.
The Line Description record is defined thus:
H:DESCRIPTION*
where:
C.7
DESCRIPTION
is from the pipe DESC attribute (max 80 characters). If no

description has been entered in PDMS, a dummy record of
the form H:* is output.
Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle

The MTO file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of records for each
pipeline or isometric sheet:
Batch Header
MTO Line Header
MTO Drawing Header
Component records (one

record for each material
list entry)
for each pipeline

isometric sheet
A maximum of 200 pipelines or isometric sheets may be included in each file. In the
following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is a
record terminator.
The Batch Header record is defined thus:
BATCH888821JAN99MATOPROJNUMB
where:
BATCH
8888
is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number
21JAN99
is the run date when the pipe was detailed
MATO
is a fixed identifier for an MTO file
PROJNUMB
is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)
The MTO Line Header record is defined thus:
$L:AREA:LINENUMBER:SHEET NO:RUNTYPE::U or C:S or L*
C:5
12.0

where:
$L
AREA
is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters)
LINENUMBER
is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14

characters)
SHEET NO
is the isometric sheet number, e.g. 01
RUNTYPE
is data type transferred, always set to A (Actual)
U or C
signifies reports will have User or Client Itemcodes
S or L
signifies reports will have Short or Long Descriptions
The Drawing Header record is defined thus:
$D:DRWGNUMBER::REVISION*
where:
$D
DRWGNUMBER
is from the pipe CDRG attribute (max 24 characters)
REVISION
is from the pipe REV attribute (max 2 characters)
If the CDRG attribute for a pipe is unset or blank, a drawing number will be automatically
generated, based on the pipe nominal size and name. This will take the form:
1.1/2PIPENAME
for pipes using imperial bores
40MM-PIPENAME
for pipes using metric bores (MM- is the default Atext 453)
Each component entry on the material list has an equivalent entry in the MTO file.
Components are classified as in-spec being in the specification set at pipe level,
alternative-spec being in a different specification, and out-of-spec being in no pipe
specification (a concept PDMS does not have).
The in-Spec Component record is defined thus:
n::SHORT CODE:TAG NUMBER:1st NS:2nd NS:3rd NS:QUANTITY:BOLTLENGTH:*
where:
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag

= FALSE
SHORT CODE
is from the detail texts SCOD (max 3 characters)
TAG NUMBER
unique identifier (max 8 characters), see Notes
1st NS
is main size, of the form 1.1/2 (imperial) or 40 (metric)
2nd NS
is second size (format as for 1st NS)
C:6
12.0

= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag
3rd NS
is third size (format as for 1st NS)
QUANTITY
is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets (max 6

characters)
BOLTLENGTH
is length of bolts, see Notes
Notes:
1. Short code is a reference to a component entry in the Compipe specification.
2. Instruments and supports take a tag number from their PDMS name if the options
INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used.
3. Standard assemblies take a tag number of their itemcode, which is not unique, but is
the same for all assemblies of the same content/configuration, i.e. standard assembly
number.
4. Quantity is an integer number for components, or a length for tube. For bolts it is the
number of sets, not the number of bolts. Also for bolts, the size is the pipeline nominal
size, not the bolt diameter.
5. Boltlength is preceded by the character H to indicate an override to COMPIPE. Metric
lengths take the form H120.0. Imperial lengths take the form H4.3/4.
Where a change of spec occurs in the pipeline, an Alternative Spec record is output,
defined thus:
n::YY:ALTERNATESPEC:::::*
where:
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE
YY
is a fixed identifier to indicate alternative spec
ALTERNATESPEC
is the alternative spec name (max 6 characters)
Components from the alternative spec then follow, with records to the same format as inspec components, except that a Y character is output as a prefix to their short code. A return
to the standard spec for the pipe is indicated by the additional Y character no longer being
output. Note that the output of Alternative spec records may be suppressed if the
SPECBreak BRANch option is used.
Out-of-specification components take two records, defined thus:
n:::ITEMCODE:QUANTITY*
where:
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE,
= 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE
ITEMCODE
is from the components itemcode (max 12 characters)
QUANTITY
is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets
N.S.:::::::*
C:7
12.0

where:
N.S.
is the nominal size of the component
Note: Out-of-specification components can only be from additional items on the material
list' in ISODRAFT, i.e. not normal pipeline components.
C:8
12.0

Recommendations for Importing DXF files from

ISODRAFT into MicroStation
D.1
Introduction
Isometrics produced using ISODRAFT can be passed into MicroStation as DXF files for
amendment or the production of a DGN equivalent for issue. These notes refer only to
MicroStation/J and the DXF files produced from ISODRAFT.
A straightforward import of an ISODRAFT DXF file into a freshly installed version of
MicroStation/J produces a picture which has accurate rendition of the isometric vectors but
fonts and colour are not correct. Neither can a plot be produced, as the colour is white on
white.
The comments in these notes refer mainly to fonts and colour and how to bring them into
line with the original isometric. Experienced MicroStation users may know simpler ways of
doing this.
D.2
Importing a DXF File

MicroStation has basic facilities for the importation of DXF files. You have the chance to do
this when invoking MicroStation or if already running MicroStation then the Edit>Import
menu would be used.
During import you may be invited to change various parameters to do with the control of
DXF/DGN translations. Initially at least these should be ignored and the DXF file simply
opened to observe the results.
D.3
Fonts
PDMS has a very large number of font files that have been assembled over a long period
from the public domain, in-house and the user community. They have all been translated to
the AutoCAD standard and take the form of pairs of source (.shp) and compiled (.shx) files.
D.3.1
Installing Fonts
ISODRAFT uses only one set of PDMS text style/font associations:
Text style
Font
HTX1
o8116901
D:1
12.0

To make AutoCAD-type fonts available within MicroStation the relevant fonts must be
installed into MicroStation using the standard facilities:
D.3.2
Utilities/Install Fonts menu.

To keep them separate the required fonts should be installed into a new font library called,
perhaps, pdms.rsc which should be placed with the supplied libraries in the path:
... \bentley\workspace\system\symb
MicroStation refers to fonts by a number not by the name.
Now use the Element>Text menu to check the installation. The newly installed fonts should
be visible together with the font numbers assigned by MicroStation to the new fonts.
If required you may change the MicroStation font number as follows:
1. Use the Utilities>Install Fonts menu to give the Font installer dialog box.
2. Select font file on destination and change to desired font number.
The new fonts will not yet be visible to the MicroStation import function.
D.4
DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the

Import Function
DXF/DGN Import and export operations refer to a compiled file which on installed
MicroStation/J is:
...\bentley\home\prefs\dwgdata\dwgcontrol.bas
On some installations, this may alternatively be:
...\bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg\dwg.bas
This file is a macro file written in the MicroStation macro language BASIC that controls
several areas where translations between DWG and DGN are specified. One of these areas
is font mapping.
For AutoCAD fonts the font style is obtained from the shx/shp font file and a shape file may
have many styles.
In MicroStation/J this condition is recognised. In order to map a particular style associated
with a font file to the required MicroStation font number, it is necessary to include extra
information in the font section of the translation control file. For example:
MbeFontNameTable.addImportEntry "htx1", "o8116901", 168, 1.09, 0
The last two optional parameters enable control of text width and text obliquity (slope) which
MicroStation does not handle well.
This line maps style htx1 in font file o8116901.shx to the MicroStation font 168 using an X
scaling factor of 1.09 and no oblique characters. The value of 1.09 for this particular
mapping was obtained by experiment and compensates for the arbitrary character spacing
output by ISODRAFT.
For the PDMS fonts there is one style per file.
D.5
Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File

The MicroStation/J macro control file, dwgcontrol.bas, should be compiled after editing.
D:2
12.0

1. On the Utilities>Macro window choose Browse

2. Select dwgcontrol.bas.
3. Running the macro constitutes compilation.
It is possible that when the macro is run an error message will appear. In this case the
necessary DXF/DGN translators are not yet available to MicroStation and to make them
available it is necessary to use the import function on any DXF file:
1. On the file/import menu choose DWG or DXF and load any DXF file.
2. Now repeat the Utilities>Macro actions above, and exit MicroStation.
3. On restart using the DXF option, the font translation will be active and a true rendition
of text should be seen.
D.6
Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts)

It is not possible to install any 16 bit font (.shx) file into MicroStation/J or earlier.
D.7
Colour
There is no explicit colour information in the ISODRAFT DXF file. The PDMS colour
information is implicit. This is because of a convention used, which associates a layer name
with a colour. This means that layer name GT_n in the DXF file means PDMS colour n. Thus
all objects with the same colour are on the same DXF layer.
In MicroStation an incoming DXF file turns on a default colour table that appears to be the
default colour table used by AutoCAD:
Individual objects have the default colour value 6 (on a scale starting at 0) which
translates to the AutoCAD default 7 (on a scale starting at 1).
The colour value is white so everything is white and there can never be any
discrimination between colours.
Symbology is not set for any object, so when it is turned on everything changes to red
(0), which is 1 on the AutoCAD default table.
The PDMS colour information in the DXF file delivered as GT_ layer names may be
translated to MicroStation level values by use of the layer/level mapping file used in the
import process.
The default file for this is: dwglevel.tbl (in ..\Bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg).
Thus PDMS colours 1 - 12 (Layers GT_1 to GT_2) may be made manifest in the DGN file as
levels 1 - 12 by additional entries to this file:
Layer in DXF file
Level
GT_1
GT 2
GT_12
12
In order to produce true PDMS colours in MicroStation DGN files, it will be necessary to
provide a key-in command as a mdl (MicroStation Development Language) function that
will map the DGN levels to PDMS colours.
D:3
12.0

D.8
Plotting the DGN file

To get a normal black and white plot of the MicroStation DGN file created on import it is
necessary to reduce the number of colours set in the active file: printer.plt. The value of
num_pens in this file should be changed from 255 to 1.
D:4
12.0
Index
A
ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Adding elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
ALLO attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
Alternative texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
ANGLEACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
ATEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
ATTAs:identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:14
ATTAs:split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:103
ATTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15
B
Bend table:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Bending table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90
Bendradius:bend table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16
Bendradius:radii description units . . . . . 2:16
Bendradius:standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16
Blank area, reserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104
Bolt Report:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Bolt Report:file specification . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Bolt Report:output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
BOLTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
Bolting:length descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
BOLTREPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
BORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
Bores:units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
C
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . 2:22
Character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23, 2:94

CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24
CLLENGTHFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Commands:abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Commands:arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
COMPIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1
COMPIPE:Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1, C:4
COMPIPE:Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1
COMPIPE:MTO file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:5
COMPIPE:Pipe attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
COMPIPE:Text attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
Continuation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:27
Continuation sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:28
Continuation symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:27
Continuation welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29
Continuation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27
CONTNOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27
COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29
COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30
Creating macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101
Cut pipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34
CUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
CUTMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Cutmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
CUTPIPELISTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34
CUTTINGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
D
Date:format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default settings:resetting . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design conditions table . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index page 1
2:37
2:83
2:38
2:91
12.0
DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:39
Detail areas, dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
DETAILPLOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91
DIMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:42
Dimensioning style . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:44
Dimensions:drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . 2:106
Distance units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
DISTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
Drawing history table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91
Dynamic detail areas:Atexts . . . . . . . . . 4:10
ITEMCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:64, 2:65
J
JOINTNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67
K
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:68
L
E
ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50
Elevation coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:50
Erection details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
F
Fabrication details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Fall rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:51
FALLINGLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:51
FALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54
FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55
File
specifying plot file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55
File:message file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81
File:transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:97, 2:98
Flow arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:57
FLOWARROWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57
format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34
Frame lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59
G
Grip length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
I
INSTALL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59
INSTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59
Instruments:display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60
Insulation:plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:61
INSULATIONCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61
ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Isometric Drawing Area#_IsoDrawingArea 4:1
Isometric:annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89
Isometric:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Isometric:display of information . . . . . . 2:62
Isometric:plotting scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89
Isometric:scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:87
ISOTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Item numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50
Line Summary:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8

LINETHICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE . . 2:70, 3:15
M
MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
Margin:width specification . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
MARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:71
MATCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72
Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Material Control File:Creating . . . . . . . . 5:1
Material Control File:creating . . . . . . . . 2:72
Material Control File:Definition . . . . . . . . 5:1
Material Control File:extended . . . . . . . . 5:1
Material Control File:Format . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Material descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 2:49, 2:82
Material list:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6, 4:9
Material List:displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73
Material list:item numbering . . . . . . . . . 2:50
MATERIALLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73
MATLISTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:79
Measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:126
MESSAGEACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:80
MESSAGEFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81
MTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:82
N
Numbering joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67
Numbering pulled bends . . . . . . . . . . . 2:86
O
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83
OUTCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83
OVERALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:86
P
PBENDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:86
PICTURESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87
Index page 2
12.0
PLOTDETAILDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88
Plotted leg length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:69
Plotting isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:39
PLOTTINGSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89
POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89
PRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98
PREPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:97, 2:98
PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98
Project number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99
PROJECTNUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99
Q
Querying options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99
R
RECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101
REFDIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101
Reference dimensions . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:101
Relative text positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:93
REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102
Removing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102
REPEATABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103
RESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104
S
Screen layout:saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59
SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105, 2:106
SKEWBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106
Skewed piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:106
Spatial coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:30
SPECBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:111
SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:112
Splitting drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:112
Splitting tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:124
SPOOLNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113
STACKINGARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . 2:115
SUPPORTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:116
SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117
Symbol keys:BEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Symbol keys:CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Symbol keys:CLOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Symbol keys:COUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Symbol keys:CROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Symbol keys:definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Symbol keys:deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38
Symbol keys:ELBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Symbol keys:FBLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Symbol keys:FILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Symbol keys:FLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
Symbol keys:FTUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15
Symbol keys:INST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Symbol keys:LJSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21

Symbol keys:OLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
Symbol keys:PCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
Symbol keys:REDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25
Symbol keys:reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Symbol keys:SHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
Symbol keys:TEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
Symbol keys:TRAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34
Symbol keys:UNIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
Symbol keys:UNIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
Symbol keys:Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
Symbol keys:VALV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:37
Symbol keys:VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39
Symbol keys:VFWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39
Symbol keys:VTWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40
Symbol keys:WELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
Symbol library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117
SYMBOLFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117
T
TAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:118
TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:118
Text:positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90
Text:rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90
TEXTPOSITION, see POSITION . . . . . 2:89
Title block:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
TITLEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:121
TRACINGCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:122
Transfer file:creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24
Transfer file:processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98
TRANSFERFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . 2:123
TRUNCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:123
TUBESPLITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:124
U
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME . . . . . . . . . . 2:125
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:126
User Defined Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91
V
View direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
W
WASTAGE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:127
Weld Box:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
Weld table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91
WELDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:129
WELDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:129
Welds:identification . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:129
Index page 3
12.0
Welds:numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:129

Welds:types displayed . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:131
WELDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:131
Z
ZEROLENGTHSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . 2:132
Index page 4
12.0

ISODRAFT Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISODRAFT Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISODRAFT

AVEVA Solutions Ltd